Quarterlytics / Technology / Semiconductors / Nanoco Group plc

Nanoco Group plc

nano · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker nano
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry Semiconductors
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Nanoco Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
N

a

n

o

c

o

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

–

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0

possibilities

Annual Report 
and Accounts 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Infinite possibilities

Our platform technology can be customised for 
almost any application, from sensing to display, and 
from horticultural lighting to medical applications.

That’s what we mean by infinite possibilities.

Strong foundations in our technology platform

Nanoco is a market leader in the research, development, licensing and 
large scale manufacture of novel nanomaterials for use in various 
commercial applications.

Platform technology

IP portfolio

Volume production

Experienced team

We can design and 
create nanomaterials 
for a host of different 
applications

Our IP portfolio protects our 
unique production process 
and materials, with significant 
process know-how

Our unique production 
process allows 
controllable manufacture 
on a large scale

Our R&D team has 
many years of specialist 
experience creating novel 
nanomaterials

 more on p5

 more on p16

 more on p19

 more on p32

Strategic report

Our year in brief

We have successfully delivered a number of critical objectives during a challenging year

  Signed new contracts to develop novel materials for infra-red sensing and display applications

  Commenced legal action against Samsung for wilful infringement of our IP

  Secured substantial third party funding for the Samsung lawsuit

  Over-subscribed equity fundraise that facilitated participation from retail investors

  Restructured the business to focus resources and reduce monthly cash costs by 50%

  Extended our cash runway to December 2022

Revenue

Loss after tax

Billings

Cash

£3.9m
-46%

(£5.1m)
+17%

£2.5m
-74%

£5.2m
-26%

  Fall in revenue reflects end 
of US Customer contract 
in H1 FY20

  Fall in revenue offset 
by cost reductions

  Gross margins from R&D 

sales contracts improve 
working capital

  Partly offset by new 

business wins in H2 in 
sensing and display

services remain strong and 
costs closely controlled

  Contracted backlog 
for FY21 of £0.9 million

to December 2022

  Monthly cash burn rate 

improved to £0.4 million, 
before revenue and tax 
credits

  Billing terms in new 

  Cash runway extended 

For more on Nanoco, visit our new website: 
www.nanocotechnologies.com

Corporate governance

Financial statements

Contents

Strategic report

Our year in brief 

001

Board of Directors 

Nanoco at a glance 

002

Corporate governance statement 

About our CFQD® platform 

005

Nominations Committee report 

Chairman’s statement  

006

Audit Committee report 

Chief Executive Officer’s statement  009

Remuneration Committee report 

Revenue streams 

012

Directors’ remuneration report 

Section 172 (1) statement 

014  

Directors’ report 

Our business model 

016

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities  079

Our strategy 

Our key performance indicators 

Financial review 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

Viability statement 

Sustainability 

018

020

022

025

028

030

036

038

047

050

056

059

076

Independent auditors’ report 

080

Consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income 

 Consolidated statement 
of changes in equity 

Company statement  
of changes in equity 

Group and Company 
statements of financial position 

Group and Company 
cash flow statements 

Notes to the financial statements 

Investor information 

085  

086

086

087

088

089

116

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 001

Nanoco at a glance

We design, develop, scale up and manufacture 
novel nanomaterials for use in a wide range 
of potential applications

Our core competencies

World-class talent

Respected globally

  We custom design new 

nanomaterials to exploit 
their emissive, absorption 
and other properties

  Our IP protected processes 
allow high quality control 
of manufacturing on 
a large scale

  At 1st October 2020, 54 
employees, of whom 13 
are inventors

  R&D and HQ functions 

in Manchester, UK

  Twin production facilities 

  14 staff with PhDs

in Runcorn, UK

  Our materials can be 
used in a variety of 
commercial applications

  Significant amount 
of know-how and 
business secrets

  11 nationalities of staff: 

  Partnerships in a number 

American, British, German, 
Irish, Indian, Italian, 
Lithuanian, Polish, 
Portuguese, Syrian 
and Ukrainian

of regions

Why invest in Nanoco?

  Platform technology gives access 

to a wide range of large and rapidly 
growing end markets such as sensing 
(Internet of Things), display, specialist 
lighting and medical

Large and 
defensible IP 
portfolio

731

patents granted 
or pending

Market opportunity 
for QD materials

$25bn1

by 2022

Highly innovative 
employees

13

listed inventors

Pioneer in 
cadmium-free 
quantum dot 
technology

Diverse channel 
partners

Continuing 
investment 
in R&D

£3.1m

invested in 2020

Significant 
manufacturing scale

£130m

revenue capacity 

CEO report 

p9

1  Source – management estimate based on multiple independent market reports.

002

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportDual capabilities at our Runcorn manufacturing facility

  Based at Runcorn, UK, an area with extensive chemical industry 

expertise and supply chains

  Production footprint of 22,000ft2

  Dedicated facility for CFQD® quantum dots used in display, lighting 

and life sciences

  Separate facility for nanomaterials for use in infra-red sensing applications (IRQDs)

  Revenue capacity in excess of £130 million when fully loaded at current market prices

Large and growing  
addressable markets

  Three major industries served

  Two major licensees

  One major development agreement

  A number of commercial research 
and development opportunities 
in progress or under discussion

Internet 
of Things

Security 
and 
detection

Infra-red 
sensing

Electronics

$8.0bn1

addressable market 
c.2022

Autonomous 
vehicles

CFQD® 
film

Solar farm 
combinations

CFQD® 
technology 
platform

Lighting

$8.5bn1

addressable market 
c.2022

QD on 
microLED

Display

$7.5bn1

addressable market 
c.2022

Horticultural 
lighting

Business model

p16

1 

 Source – management estimate based on multiple independent market reports.

Electro-
luminescence

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 003

Infinite possibilities

What are nanomaterials and what is a quantum dot?
Nanomaterials are any material that has a dimension or structure measured at the 
nanoscale, typically 10,000 to 100,000 times narrower than human hair (1–100 nm). 
Nanomaterials have unique optical, electrical and mechanical properties often not 
accessible in the bulk material. This can enhance properties such as light absorption, 
emission, strength, reactivity and conductivity.

 Quantum dots are a subclass of nanomaterials whose optical and electronic 
properties depend on their size, shape and composition.

1
0
n
m

5
n
m

2
n
m

What this all means…

The Group’s platform technology means that we can design and 
manufacture a bespoke material for a customer’s requirements across 
a wide range of applications and industry sectors. For example, highly 
absorptive dots can be used in infra-red sensing or solar energy 
applications. Efficient emission dots can be used in high end displays 
to create fantastic colour clarity and a brilliant range of colours.

Nanoco’s CFQD® quantum dots are free of cadmium and other 
toxic heavy metals with clear environmental benefits, including 
improving energy efficiency.

004

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic report

About our CFQD® platform

Our technology has a wide range of 
applications and we have the expertise 
and knowledge to exploit them

Emit light in precisely 
controlled wavelengths 
for wide colour gamut

Improved energy 
efficiency reduces 
power consumption 

Nanosecond lifetime 
enables increased 
modulation

Reduces production 
challenges, cost 
and complexity

Emission wavelength of 
CFQD® quantum dots can 
be tuned to nanometre 
resolution, thereby improving 
efficiency and effectiveness.

CFQD® quantum dots’ 
nanometre precision and 
narrow width of emission 
improve efficiency over 
conventional phosphors.

Emission lifetimes 1,000 times 
faster than conventional 
phosphors open up 
applications requiring high 
light modulation speeds.

Wide excitation absorbance 
band and flexibility in product 
form factors allow CFQD® 
quantum dots to be easily 
integrated into applications.

  Increases colour gamut 
of displays by allowing 
high specificity of LCD 
pixel emission

  Enables tuning of lighting 
fixtures to increase the 
range of visible colours 
illuminated underneath

  Enhances plant growth 
with improved tuning of 
horticultural lighting to 
target specific molecules 
in different plant species

  Less light lost to subpixel 

colour filters in high colour 
gamut displays

  Improved screen refresh 
rates on displays for 
gaming and virtual reality

  No emission loss to 

  Opportunities to integrate 

non-visible near infra-red 
wavelengths in high 
colour rendering general 
lighting fixtures

  Lower loss of output 

gives the ability to reduce 
energy input

LiFi into conventional 
light fittings for secure 
data connections

  Less stringent binning 

required on blue excitation 
LEDs for display applications 
reducing component cost 
and improving supplier 
availability

  Sheet form factor allows for 
simple drop in integration 
to current electronics, 
eliminating retooling costs

  Ink jet and spin coat 

processing allow for low 
cost manufacture of next 
generation µLED and 
OLED/QD hybrid devices

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 005

Strategic report

Chairman’s statement

Developing new 
applications for our 
platform technology

This has been a year of substantial 

change for Nanoco. We finished 
the year with new leadership and 
a more focused team, poised to 

win new business in our core target sectors. 
This new focus was strongly endorsed by 
our shareholders, who supported the 
raising of £3.4 million in new equity.

DR CHRISTOPHER RICHARDS
Chairman

Summary

  Over-subscribed equity fundraise 

extends our cash runway to 
December 2022.

  New business wins for sensing 

applications and new materials 
being developed leading to potential 
commercial production in 2022 if 
development and scale-up succeeds.

  New development agreement signed 

for a novel display application.

  Litigation initiated against Samsung 
for wilful infringement of Nanoco’s IP. 

  Lawsuit funded by a large US-based 

litigation finance house with extensive 
experience in IP technology litigation.

  Restructuring of the business to create 
a flexible team focused on executing 
existing customer projects and 
winning new opportunities.

  Formal Sales Process terminated 

in April 2020 amidst the uncertainty 
and delays arising from the 
Covid-19 pandemic.

As we closed the year, a number of small 
but significant commercial wins were 
added to our existing agreements with 
ST Microelectronics (“ST Micro”), including 
new applications in the sensing and 
display sectors, to give £1.0 million of 
contracted revenues for FY21.

We successfully completed the final 
deliverables for the US Customer in 
December 2019. While it was disappointing 
that the contract was not extended, we 
developed new materials and a new 
production facility that we will leverage 
in future opportunities.

The launch of litigation proceedings 
against Samsung was an important 
step to protect our IP. The funding we 
subsequently achieved for that litigation 
is both critical to facilitating a successful 
outcome while being a strong third party 
endorsement of the strength of our case.

We have taken decisive action to reduce 
our cost base, starting by reducing the 
cost of the Board, while retaining our key 
operational capabilities. In combination 
with the equity fundraise, we have 
significantly extended the cash runway 
for the Group to December 2022. The 
Company is now determined to rebuild the 
organic value of the business, alongside 
the potential substantial shareholder 
value inherent in the Samsung lawsuit.

Strategy and business activity

Nanoco’s platform technology remains 
our key strategic focus (our “dot only” 
strategy). Following a strategic review, we 
decided to focus on a limited number of 

006

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

opportunities where our core capabilities 
give us the largest competitive edge.

We are therefore prioritising sensing 
and display applications with short-term 
commercial prospects. We are also 
exploiting the assets we generated 
during the relationship with the US 
Customer in the electronics industry. 
Our new five-year agreement with ST 
Micro creates multiple routes to leverage 
value from those assets and know-how.

By using the outstanding skills of our 
technical teams, we continue to move 
deeper into the sensing and display 
fields where our nanomaterials can offer 
real competitive advantage.

 “Our platform technology 
and deep IP portfolio have 
significant value and are 
relevant across a wide 
range of markets and 
commercial applications.”

We continue to explore alternative 
partnership arrangements with various 
parties to increase channels to market 
and penetration in certain strategic 
territories. Engagement also continues 
with existing and former licence partners.

Samsung litigation

Extensive efforts over the previous twelve 
months led to the Group filing a lawsuit 
on 14 February 2020 against Samsung for 
what we allege to be wilful infringement 
of our IP in a number of key areas. This 
was a necessary step to protect our core 
IP assets. Having worked collaboratively 
with Samsung on a number of key areas 
for many years it was disappointing that 

Strategic report“ This has been a 
very tough year 
in which our staff 
have continued 
to deliver new 
ideas, solutions 
and services 
to satisfied 
customers. With 
our balance 
sheet more 
secure and our 
cash runway 
extended to the 
end of 2022, we 
will rebuild the 
business around 
our core sensing 
and display 
opportunities 
while driving 
the Samsung 
litigation in 
defence of 
our extensive 
and valuable 
IP portfolio.”

Following the successful completion 
of the equity fundraising in July 2020, 
Michael Edelman stepped down from 
the Board and as CEO with effect from 
1 September 2020. Michael remains 
available to the Group in his role 
as Special Adviser to the Litigation 
Sub-Committee and, on behalf of the 
Board and all of our staff, I would like to 
take this opportunity to thank Michael for 
his many years of service to the Group. 
Nigel Pickett’s notice as CTO was served 
in March 2020 and is due to expire in 
March 2021. Nigel remains fully engaged 
with the business and the Board will 
review his position in the months ahead.

In 2018, we combined the executive roles 
of COO and CFO and appointed Brian 
Tenner to that post. The aim was to provide 
enhanced and visible leadership to our 
business operations and support functions 
in the UK. Reflecting the positive impact 
he has made on all aspects of the business 
since his appointment, the Board was 
pleased to implement its succession 
plans and appoint Brian as CEO on 
1 September 2020.

Supporting Brian and Nigel in the business 
we have a highly experienced and capable 
Leadership team with Kevin Smith 
responsible for production operations, 
Liam Gray responsible for finance and 
a number of other supporting functions, 
and Joss Little as HR Business Partner. 
The Group also has an extremely 
talented senior management team 
and has retained a highly skilled and 
adaptable workforce with the skills 
and experience needed to drive the 
business forward. 

Continuing with the succession plan, 
Liam Gray has been appointed as UK 
Finance Director and Company Secretary 
and will attend Board meetings in those 
capacities. The Board will consider other 
changes to the Executive team and other 
management as activity levels and 
resources require.

Looking forward, the Board will continue 
to pursue the highest standards of 
corporate governance for the benefit 
of all stakeholders while operating in 
a more focused and less costly way.

no commercial licence or supply 
agreement followed. We have 
established a new sub-committee of the 
Board to manage the litigation process.

We also successfully secured third party 
funding for the lawsuit. This will protect 
the Group’s financial resources and 
entitles the funder to a return only in the 
event of a successful outcome to the suit. 
Given the potential scale of a successful 
outcome, it was critical to ensure that the 
Group has adequate funding for its own 
activities while the suit is ongoing. This 
has now been achieved with the over-
subscribed equity fundraise giving the 
Group a cash runway that currently 
extends to December 2022.

Covid-19 and financial performance

The Board responded promptly to the 
Covid-19 pandemic, leading the way with 
reductions in Director salaries which were 
followed by Company-wide temporary 
pay reductions and the adoption of the 
Government Job Retention Scheme. At 
its peak, the Group saw approximately 
two-thirds of its staff on furlough with 
staff in work limited to those on customer 
driven activities. The Board would like 
to thank our dedicated staff for their 
exceptional efforts in maintaining customer 
service during this challenging time.

Effective and prompt management 
action was taken to manage our costs 
tightly. Our monthly gross cash costs are 
stabilising at around £0.4 million per 
month. The cash burn rate then reduces 
further with the benefit of revenues and 
R&D tax credits to £0.3 million per month.

It was a major achievement by the end 
of the year to be able to extend our cash 
runway to December 2022, particularly 
when our preliminary results in October 
2019 indicated a cash runway that only 
extended to July 2020. Any new business 
wins will enhance this further.

No dividend is proposed for the year 
(2019: none).

Governance and Board

After extensive Board discussions and 
engagement with major shareholders, 
in line with the reductions in the scale 
of our operations, we decided to reduce 
the size and cost of the Board. Once the 
announced changes are complete, the 
cost of the Board will be broadly half 
its previous level.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 007

Chairman’s statement continued

Formal Sales Process

Outlook

We commenced a Formal Sales Process 
in November 2019 to reflect our view 
that the Group’s value would be best 
protected and exploited in the longer 
term by being part of a larger Group. 
After a number of expressions of interest 
and detailed due diligence activity, 
progress slowed as the effects of the 
Covid-19 pandemic made themselves 
felt around the world.

We therefore decided to terminate the 
Formal Sales Process in April 2020 to 
allow us to focus on reshaping the 
business as set out above.

Employees and shareholders

Our staff have again demonstrated 
great commitment in a challenging year. 
The team continues to deliver great 
service, innovative ideas and practical 
solutions to our customers.

Unfortunately, a number of staff had to 
leave the business during the year and 
shortly after the year end as we work to 
balance our financial resources, activity 
levels, ongoing customer contracts and 
cash runway.

We wish all of those former members of 
staff well in their future endeavours.

As we look forward, it is the continuing 
dedication and professionalism of our 
highly skilled team that will create new 
and enhanced value for all stakeholders. 
The Board is grateful for its continuing 
contributions and commitment.

I would also like to thank our shareholders 
for their continuing support and in 
particular their confidence in our future 
as shown in the over-subscription for our 
equity fundraise in July 2020. It was a key 
objective to allow our loyal retail investors 
to participate in the fundraise and it 
was gratifying to see so many take the 
opportunity to continue to support the 
Group. I look forward to speaking to 
as many as possible at our AGM to 
be held via video conferencing on 
3 December 2020.

The Group has delivered a number of 
notable successes in a year that started 
inauspiciously with the decision by the 
US Customer not to sign a new contract 
when the current one ended in 
December 2019. The challenges were 
exacerbated by running a Formal Sales 
Process in parallel with normal business 
activities, followed by the onset of the 
Covid-19 pandemic. These combined 
challenges would have been formidable 
for any business and I am proud of how 
the small Nanoco team responded. 
I would particularly like to thank the 
Non-Executive Directors, who selflessly 
gave very significant time to Nanoco as 
evidenced in the Corporate governance 
report and the number of Board, 
Committee and informal meetings 
held during the year.

The Board remains convinced of the 
strong merits of our broad-based 
platform technology. The last year 
has seen a number of enquiries on 
new applications for our nanomaterials 
in sensing and display.

The new framework agreement with 
ST Micro is a foundation for a potential 
move into commercial production in 
the medium term. Key milestones to 
be delivered in the next 12–18 months 
will include the successful delivery of the 
new material at an R&D scale in Phase 1 
of the programme. This will then lead 
to a potential customer decision to 
progress to Phase 2 of the development 
programme with a transition into 
scale-up activities in the second half 
of FY21. If scale-up is successful, the 
customer will then have the option to move 
to preliminary pre-production manufacture 
at Runcorn and ultimately to full scale 
commercial production thereafter.

However, we must be cautious. We 
have been in this position before on the 
programme with the US Customer. In that 
case, the Nanoco team delivered every 
milestone but other considerations led to 
the cancellation of the product of which 
we were a crucial part. Once again, 
Nanoco is part of a complex supply 

chain and the project could fail even 
when we (as we fully expect) meet all 
of our targets. If any other part of the 
supply chain fails, or if the end customers 
decide not to adopt the technology 
or to make design changes to their 
own products – all of these can have an 
adverse impact on Nanoco which could 
again require further restructuring.

It is because of this uncertainty and our 
financial resources that we will be taking 
a prudent approach to pursuing new 
commercial opportunities, how we deploy 
our human and financial capital, and 
how we manage our cost base.

The Group has now been restructured 
around a highly skilled and adaptable 
workforce that can be flexed across 
different activities and products as 
customer opportunities dictate. This 
is a robust foundation on which our 
organic business can build.

We have also secured funding for the 
potentially valuable lawsuit against 
Samsung for what we believe to be a 
wilful infringement of our IP, and now 
have the financial means to support 
Nanoco itself through to its likely 
conclusion, including in a scenario 
where further commercial progress is 
not delivered in the new financial year.

The Group’s core assets, team and 
capabilities and the Samsung lawsuit 
remain, in the opinion of the Board, 
an attractive investment opportunity. 
The Board therefore remains confident 
in the value inherent in the business.

Dr Christopher Richards
Chairman
13 October 2020

008

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportChief Executive Officer’s statement

Stabilising the business 
to rebuild value

BRIAN TENNER
Chief Executive Officer

The Group made a number of 

significant achievements this year 
that set the scene for potential 
future value creation. This was 

against a very difficult economic backdrop 
and required very high levels of activity 
from the Board, the Executive team, and 
all of our staff.

In the second half, we reached an 
important new five-year agreement 
with ST Microelectronics NV (“ST Micro”) 
that utilises our capabilities with 
nanomaterials for use in infra-red 
sensing applications. This, and certain 
other development agreements, 
provide Nanoco with strong customer 
relationships on which we plan to build 
the business over the coming years. 

We also launched litigation against 
Samsung for the wilful infringement of our 
IP and subsequently secured third party 
funding for this suit. The costs of this 
litigation could exceed $10 million and 
will now be borne by the funder in return 
for a share of any award or settlement. 
The year was then completed with an 
over-subscribed equity fundraise, 
extending the Group’s cash runway 
to the end of 2022.

A Formal Sales Process was launched 
in November 2019 and occupied a lot 
of management bandwidth until it was 

terminated in the midst of the Covid-19 
pandemic in April 2020. By that time the 
Group had also commenced a consultation 
process to restructure the business, 
introduced a furlough scheme to take 
advantage of the Government’s Job 
Retention Scheme, and implemented salary 
reductions for all staff to conserve cash.

Our team today now numbers 
approximately 45 staff and we have 
more than halved our installed cost base 
from over £12.0 million in FY19 to around 
£5.0 million on an underlying basis for 
FY21 (underlying excludes severance 
and notice costs). In so doing, we have 
retained our core capabilities in R&D, 
scale-up and manufacturing, including 
both facilities at our Runcorn site. 
Maintaining these core capabilities 
and facilities is essential to deliver 
the business we hope to win over the 
coming months.

Business performance

Electronics

In the first half we successfully completed 
the final deliverables for the US Customer. 
This followed the disappointing news in 
June 2019 that a new hoped for programme 
of work would not be forthcoming. 

ABOVE:
Laboratories at Nanoco.

All revenues under the work programme 
were earned in full.

Early in the second half we then had more 
positive news with the announcement of 
a five-year collaboration with ST Micro 
to develop and scale up nanomaterials 
for use in infra-red sensing. The master 
agreement was followed shortly thereafter 
with a development work programme for 
a new material and delivery schedules 
for test and validation volumes of an 
existing material.

Given the scale of the sector and the 
participants, we are often going to be 
part of an extensive supply chain in the 
electronics market. This does mean that 
we are subject to events and decisions 
outside of our control – as happened 
with the US Customer.

However, the new agreement with ST 
Micro allows us to take advantage of 
knowledge, skills and assets developed 
during the programme with the US 
Customer. We also now have “freedom 
to operate” and can apply those 
capabilities to applications and other 
end customers within the consumer 
electronics and other applicable markets 
through our agreement with ST Micro.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 009

Chief Executive Officer’s statement continued

Business performance continued

Electronics continued

We are actively seeking to create a 
number of new opportunities to utilise the 
dedicated Runcorn production facility for 
the large-scale manufacture of materials 
for use in infra-red sensing. ST Micro is an 
excellent partner and cornerstone. Our 
current activities are more heavily 
weighted towards development work at 
this stage and, if successful, scale-up 
projects will follow with the potential for 
commercial production volumes in the 
short to medium term.

We are therefore pursuing in parallel 
smaller market niches where we are able 
to have direct relationships with a greater 
number of smaller OEMs to allow us to 
mitigate the risk of being overly reliant on 
a very small number of larger customers. 
The same strategy applies to our work in 
CFQD and other market sectors.

The in-depth nature of our technological 
insight means that we do tend to “punch 
above our weight” in terms of direct 
engagement even with very large end 
customers and their technology teams. 
Having proven our capability on one 
material for use in sensing applications, 
we are now in discussions to develop other 
materials for use in adjacent applications.

The revenue-generating capacity of the 
new Runcorn facility remains very 
significant if appropriate commercial 
orders can be won. Our goal is still to 
transition the majority of our activity to 
commercial production, supported by our 
deep technical knowledge and skills that 
allow world leading development work 
in parallel.

Display (CFQD® quantum dots)

Display remains an important target 
market for Nanoco. To improve our 
competitive proposition, we are 
maintaining our focus on our “dot only” 
strategy where we aim to provide the 
highest performing CFQD® quantum 
dots to multiple film coating, photo-resist 
and ink producing companies.

We measure CFQD® material 
performance using a number of key 
metrics including, but not limited to, Full 
Width Half Maximum (“FWHM”) (the width 
in nanometres of the emission peak 
halfway up its height; narrower is better), 
quantum yield (“QY”) percentage (a 
measure of how efficiently the quantum 
dots absorb blue light and convert it to 
red or green light) and stability (how 

durable the quantum dot is in any 
specific application). An example of our 
improved performance in the period is a 
15% reduction of the CFQD® quantum 
dots’ FWHM while retaining very high 
quantum yields and stability.

It is also clear that as more market sectors 
look at alternative applications for quantum 
dots the range of characteristics and 
performance criteria continues to evolve 
and we are well placed to tune our 
materials over the full range of material 
characteristics.

The integration of quantum dots into 
TVs is evolving. The first generation of 
QD displays use red and green quantum 
dots in a resin, which is then coated 
onto a film and finally integrated into 
the backlight of an LCD display. This 
dramatically enhances colour performance 
and reduces power consumption. 
The second generation of QD-based 
displays will integrate red and green 
quantum dots onto a blue OLED panel 
or blue microLEDs using ink jet printing 
or photo-resist patterning technology. 
We anticipate that displays using 
second generation technology may 
enter the market as early as 2022 
though investment in the technology 
has slowed recently. 

The third generation of quantum dot 
display is electroluminescent red, green 
and blue quantum dots fabricated into a 
display. It is likely to be a number of years 
before this third generation of TVs enters 
the market on a commercial basis. Nanoco 
is active in development work in the first 
two generations and also maintains 
capabilities in the third generation.

Three years ago we modified our 
strategy from a pure licensing model 
to a hybrid business model where we 
have licensed our technology to different 
channel partners while also developing 
our own manufacturing capability. We 
continue to work with our licence partner 
DuPont (formerly Dow) as well as our 
film coating partner Wah Hong and 
have also started to increase the 
range of companies with whom we 
are actively engaged.

Merck decided not to renew its licence 
agreement and issued notice of this in 
the third quarter. We continued to work 
with Merck for the remainder of the 
contract year and still continue to 
discuss options for possible future 
collaboration and access to Nanoco 
technology and IP.

010

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Other sectors including life sciences 
and lighting

Following the need to restructure and 
downsize the business, our core focus is 
on sensing and display. Where there is 
an immediate substitution opportunity 
we will continue to proactively engage 
with other sectors. With respect to our 
Life Sciences team, our focus is on 
securing a new strategic partner to 
take the business forward, to allow us 
to concentrate our resources and efforts 
on our two core markets. If no spin-off 
is achieved, we will retain our IP and 
continue to explore clear short-term 
commercial opportunities. Other 
applications in horticultural lighting will 
be unaffected as they are a direct part 
of our CFQD® quantum dot activities.

Operations

Commissioning of the new Sensing 
production facility at Runcorn was 
finalised in the first half of the year. 
Testing and process improvements 
have increased the capacity of the 
plant beyond its original design targets.

In the Display facility, changes to our 
recipes and process routings have also 
led to significant capacity increases with 
further gains available from relatively 
modest capital expenditure should 
the need arise. While both plants are 
currently in mothball or standby mode, 
they can be fully operational in four weeks 
or less and together they represent very 
significant revenue-generating capacity.

Responding to Covid-19

At its peak, the Group had 49 of 67 staff 
on furlough. The remainder were working 
in Covid-19 secure ways by either working 
from home or, in the case of those 
needing to attend our facilities, in a 
regime of enhanced PPE, cleaning 
and social distancing.

Our reduced headcount and the layout 
of our split facilities make it easier 
to follow many of the recommended 
practices for the return to work. Having 
completed detailed risk assessments and 
implemented the resulting action plans 
we are now confident staff can safely 
return to the workplace while allowing 
remote working where possible.

Strategic reportQ&A
Q: After a turbulent year, where 
does the business go from here? 

We now have a significantly 
reduced cost base, less than half of 
the level in FY19, with a more stable 
platform of staff and funding on 
which to generate new sources of 
income over the next three years. 
With market ready products in 
Sensing and Display, and significant 
capacity for R&D services, we will 
push to achieve ongoing break even 
revenues over that period.

Q: How do you view the 
Samsung lawsuit? 

The lawsuit clearly has very 
significant potential value for the 
Group. We have a well-resourced 
third party funder in place and two 
very experienced advisers in our 
counsel and strategic adviser. Our 
current funding position secures the 
business until the end of December 
2022. We are ready for the long haul. 
The Management team can therefore 
focus on the organic side of the 
business on a day-to-day basis.

Q: What are your medium-term goals 
over the next two to three years?

The Nanoco team is now focused 
on winning new business to further 
secure our funding and extend 
our cash runway. By successfully 
completing development work on 
a number of existing opportunities, 
we can then move to scale-up and 
eventually to commercial production 
from Runcorn. The latter will very 
quickly lead to a cash-generative 
business with a much more secure 
footing for staff and our operations.

Intellectual property

We consciously rationalised the number 
of patent applications in progress during 
the year. As a result, the Group’s IP 
portfolio fell marginally to 731 patents 
and patent applications (2019: 745). 
This net reduction reflected 42 new 
applications and 56 that were dropped, 
mainly in territories where it was no longer 
felt worthwhile to pursue. We have also 
slowed the rate of filing new IP in the 
second half to preserve trade secrets 
and to conserve financial resources.

Our IP and a significant range of business 
process secrets strongly underpin the 
Group’s valuation while also operating as 
a challenging barrier to entry to potential 
competitors.

Environment/restriction of 
hazardous substances (“RoHS”)

Our commitment to protecting the 
environment is directly expressed in our 
decision to develop our CFQD® quantum 
dot products to be free of toxic cadmium, 
which is still widely used by competitors 
in their quantum dot products. 

Nanoco has participated actively 
with regulators concerning the use 
of cadmium-based quantum dots 
in displays and LED light products. 
Nanoco’s consultation response opposed 
any further extensions. The European 
Commission (“EC”) review of requests 
to extend the duration and scope of 
the current RoHS exemption remains 
outstanding at this time. We believe that 
the majority of display companies agree 
with our position and accept the need for 
new display products to be cadmium free, 
which should stimulate demand once the 
exemptions for cadmium expire.

People

Our employees have shown great 
resilience during a very uncertain year. 
They have remained focused on our 
customers and supporting each other 
while coping with the Covid-19 pandemic, 
uncertainty during the consultation process 
and a Company-wide salary reduction.

During the year and shortly after we 
have had to say farewell to just over 
20 of our valuable staff. We wish them 
all well for the future, whether in new 
careers or new academic pursuits.

For our remaining 45 staff, the combination 
of the end of the consultation process in 
September 2020, new commercial 
activity and a firmer financial foundation 

will bring welcome stability and allow the 
team to continue to display its technical 
skill and ingenuity in providing solutions 
for customers. We have managed the 
staff reductions in such a way as to 
retain our core R&D, scale-up and 
production capabilities.

The new Leadership team that we put 
in place in the prior year has performed 
well throughout the challenges of the 
year. Its support has been invaluable 
and, working with the senior management 
team and all of our staff, will help to 
maintain a disciplined and commercial 
focus to our activities in the year ahead.

Outlook

The past year has undoubtedly been a 
turbulent one with highs and lows and also 
a huge effort by the whole Nanoco team.

While we are still conscious of the risks 
around the Covid-19 pandemic, and other 
challenges ahead, some normality is now 
starting to return to the business. The 
delivery of third party funding for the 
Samsung lawsuit, the equity raise for the 
Group’s organic operations and completing 
the restructuring of the Group are all 
adding a measure of stability to the Group.

Our whole team is now focused on taking 
advantage of the extended cash runway 
for our organic business to deliver new 
commercial opportunities that will further 
extend that runway. Our existing 
commercial relationships, including live 
development projects in Sensing and 
Display, combined with a much lower cost 
base, create the potential for breakeven 
production revenues in the medium term. 
There are technical milestones to be 
delivered along the way but our track 
record of success in development gives 
us confidence in being able to deliver 
materials that meet our customers’ 
challenging performance criteria. By 
exploring other new customer applications, 
we aim to de-risk any reliance on one 
customer or product. Contingency plans 
remain in place to ensure that the potential 
value in the lawsuit can be protected.

In a more stable environment, and with our 
smaller, more focused team, I am confident 
that we can deliver value for all of our 
stakeholders in the medium term.

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 011

Revenue streams 

We have significant potential 
capacity for revenue generation 
from our multiple revenue streams 

Products

Services

Licences

Our Runcorn facility has the capacity to 
make high volumes of CFQD® quantum 
dots and HEATWAVE™ nanomaterials for 
IR sensing applications. The revenue 
generation capacity can be easily 
scaled by adding additional shifts with 
the overall potential return on the asset 
base being extremely attractive, and 
benefiting strongly from operational 
leverage if extra shifts and volumes were 
added. Revenue potential: HIGH.

Our highly skilled R&D and Scale Up 
teams are able to design, develop and 
scale new materials for customer-specific 
applications. We are able to charge 
customers for professional services when 
we carry out these sorts of development 
activities for them with rewards often 
linked to achieving technical milestones 
or outcomes. The last two financial years 
have seen significant revenue generated 
in this area. Revenue potential: MEDIUM.

When a channel partner initially acquires 
a right of access to or use of Nanoco 
technology and IP, they typically pay a 
one-off licence fee. These fees reflect 
the costs already previously incurred by 
Nanoco in developing our technology 
and IP and hence represent a return on 
those historical investments. Revenue 
potential: LOW–MEDIUM.

Royalties

As well as the ability to make and sell 
materials directly to our customers, the 
agreements with our channel partners 
(DuPont and Wah Hong) allow them 
to manufacture our materials themselves 
(or source from elsewhere under further 
licences) and then pay a royalty on the 
value of their sales to their customers. 
This revenue stream has the potential 
for very high leverage since it is not 
constrained by manufacturing scale 
and also has minimal costs associated 
with incremental sales via this channel. 
Revenue potential: HIGH.

Products

Services

Our revenue

Royalties

Licences

Our strategy

p18

012

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportInfinite possibilities

Fine-tuning light quality with CFQD®  
quantum dots technology
Large improvements have been seen by the research team in CFQD Fine Color Film™ Deep 
Red product this year. Combining the latest generation CFQD® quantum dots with 
improvements to our resin technology has yielded huge gains in the photon conversion 
efficiency of the film. For customers this has translated to a >40% increase in photosynthetic 
active radiation, enabling even more efficient plant growth.

In usage we are continuing to find innovative new applications with our partners. Latest 
interest has come from utilising CFQD Fine Color Film™ Deep Red product as a solar 
concentrator for use in commercial greenhouses. The film tunes daylight to increase the red 
component, known to optimise plant growth. This can also be combined with PV technology 
to allow greenhouse roof panels to generate electricity with no compromise on the growth 
rate of the plants within, moving us closer to carbon neutral food manufacture.

Range of colour produced 
at the relevant wavelength

400

450

500

550

600

650

700

Wavelength (nm)

What this all means…

Fine-tunable, high purity light for a variety of different 
applications ranging from mass market consumer 
electronics to high specification machine vision 
to enhancing plant growth.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 013

Strategic report

Section 172 (1) statement

Section 172 (1) report

In line with section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, the 

Directors of the Company must act in a way which they 
consider, in good faith, would most likely promote the success 
of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and 
in doing so must have regard to a number of other key matters.

Likely long-term consequences of decisions (s.172(1)(a))

Given the nature of the business, the Board takes a medium-term 
approach to its decision making to ensure that the Company 
is able to deliver its strategy of creating value for all of our 
stakeholders. Risk management is also key to understanding 
the likely consequences of actions. The Board plays a key role 
in reviewing the Company’s approach to risk, including an 
assessment of its emerging and principal risks. See pages 25 to 
27 of the Strategic report for a description of the identified risks 
and how these are being controlled or mitigated. Given the 
Group’s finances, the Board has been continually reviewing the 
Company’s current and forecast financial position. This year the 
Directors selected a two-year timeframe over which to assess 
the viability of the Company. The Viability statement can be 
found on pages 28 and 29 of the Strategic report.

Maintaining a reputation for high standards of business 
conduct (s.172(1)(e))

The Company has in place a Code of Conduct which acts as 
a guide for employees to doing the right thing. The Company 
also has well-embedded policies in place which assist with 
ensuring high standards of conduct, including in respect 
of the following key areas: health, safety and environment; 
whistleblowing; anti-bribery and corruption; human rights; 
and modern slavery. The Environmental, Social and Governance 
Disclosures section of the Directors’ Report, from pages 30 to 
35, provides further insight into measures put in place by the 
Board to assist with maintaining a reputation for high business 
conduct standards.

Acting fairly between members of the Company (s.172(1)(f))

The Directors also have regard to the need to act fairly between 
members of the Company, aiming to understand their views 
and act in their best interests. The ownership of the Company 
follows a “one share, one vote” structure, which assists with 
promoting parity in shareholder rights. The Board ensures that 
there is fair and equal dissemination of information to all 
shareholders and has a dedicated investors section on the 
Company’s website which is available to all shareholders. 

Why we engage

How we engage and respond

Impact of engagement

  To ensure employees feel valued for 

  We communicate key decisions and 

  Our employees feel empowered to achieve solutions to problems

Employees

their contribution

  To empower our employees

  To enhance our employees through training 

and progression

collaborate through our Employee Voice 
Committee, which includes Directors

  We give them the tools to work effectively

  We encourage our employees to provide 

solutions to problems

  To ensure we can provide the best service 

and products possible, to meet the 
customers’ needs

  We ensure open and constant communication 
with customers, to ensure our products and 
services are world leading

Customers

  To protect our customers’ technology

  Ensure we are complying with 

regulatory requirements

  We welcome feedback from customers, 
and work collaboratively to achieve our 
customers’ goals

  To develop long-term, collaborative 

  We create close collaborative working 

partnerships for key, difficult to source 
R&D components

Suppliers

  To mitigate the risk of not being able 

to succeed commercially

  To comply with regulatory requirements

  To ensure compliance with 
regulatory requirements

relationships with key suppliers, to ensure 
clear communication, active issue resolution 
and effective qualification of products

  We encourage open engagement, to ensure 
compliance with the relevant regulatory 
requirements

  We review our operations periodically to 

ensure compliance with regulations

Regulators

  To protect our staff and communities

  We actively maintain standards through 

  To ensure best practice

external reviews (e.g. ISO 9001 accreditation)

Shareholders

  To enable shareholders to understand 
Nanoco’s strategic aims and results

  To help understand management’s aim, 
responsibilities and incentive structures

  To understand our commitment to our staff, 
communities and the wider environment

  We build relationships with our investors through 

our investor relations activities

  In our annual reports, we update all 
stakeholders on our strategic progress, 
and explain any financial implications

  We consider investor feedback, and what 
impact this may have on the business

014

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

  Our employees feel like an asset to the business

  We improve as our employees improve

  We build strong relationships with customers, who believe in the 

capabilities of our platform technology and our employee expertise

  Our customers trust us to be able to meet their requirements to 

create world leading products

  This helps us to attain best value from our supply chain, and mitigates 

the risk of a breakdown in process negatively impacting the business

  Through regulatory checks, we ensure our suppliers are complying 

with regulatory requirements, e.g. payment of minimum wage

  Compliance with regulatory requirements enables the business 

to operate in a safe manner, protecting our employees and the 

wider communities

  We aim to create long-term investor value, through growing 

from an R&D services business to a commercially viable niche 

production company

Strategic reportThis provides easy access to RNS announcements and reports and 
publications. In the ordinary course, and outside of the prohibition on 
meeting attendance currently in force by the Government due to the 
Covid-19 pandemic, all members are invited to attend the Annual General 
Meetings of the Company, offering an opportunity for members of any 
size shareholding to have a conversation with, and ask questions to, 
each of the Directors. For any Annual General Meetings where in-person 
attendance is prohibited due to the Government’s regulation, all 
shareholders will be offered the opportunity to submit questions to the 
Board ahead of the meeting with answers being made available to them.

Having regard to specific stakeholder groups (s.172(1)(b) to s.172(1)(d))

The table which follows seeks to provide insight into how the Board carries 
out its duty under this section.

Why we engage

How we engage and respond

Impact of engagement

  To ensure employees feel valued for 

  We communicate key decisions and 

their contribution

  To empower our employees

  To enhance our employees through training 

and progression

collaborate through our Employee Voice 

Committee, which includes Directors

  We give them the tools to work effectively

  We encourage our employees to provide 

solutions to problems

  Our employees feel empowered to achieve solutions to problems
  Our employees feel like an asset to the business
  We improve as our employees improve

  To ensure we can provide the best service 

  We ensure open and constant communication 

and products possible, to meet the 

with customers, to ensure our products and 

customers’ needs

services are world leading

  We build strong relationships with customers, who believe in the 

capabilities of our platform technology and our employee expertise

  Our customers trust us to be able to meet their requirements to 

  To protect our customers’ technology

  We welcome feedback from customers, 

create world leading products

  Ensure we are complying with 

regulatory requirements

and work collaboratively to achieve our 

customers’ goals

  To develop long-term, collaborative 

  We create close collaborative working 

partnerships for key, difficult to source 

relationships with key suppliers, to ensure 

R&D components

  To mitigate the risk of not being able 

to succeed commercially

  To comply with regulatory requirements

  To ensure compliance with 

regulatory requirements

clear communication, active issue resolution 

and effective qualification of products

  We encourage open engagement, to ensure 

compliance with the relevant regulatory 

requirements

  We review our operations periodically to 

ensure compliance with regulations

  To protect our staff and communities

  We actively maintain standards through 

  To ensure best practice

external reviews (e.g. ISO 9001 accreditation)

  To enable shareholders to understand 

  We build relationships with our investors through 

Nanoco’s strategic aims and results

our investor relations activities

  To help understand management’s aim, 

  In our annual reports, we update all 

responsibilities and incentive structures

  To understand our commitment to our staff, 

stakeholders on our strategic progress, 

and explain any financial implications

communities and the wider environment

  We consider investor feedback, and what 

impact this may have on the business

  This helps us to attain best value from our supply chain, and mitigates 
the risk of a breakdown in process negatively impacting the business

  Through regulatory checks, we ensure our suppliers are complying 
with regulatory requirements, e.g. payment of minimum wage

  Compliance with regulatory requirements enables the business 
to operate in a safe manner, protecting our employees and the 
wider communities

  We aim to create long-term investor value, through growing 

from an R&D services business to a commercially viable niche 
production company

Near-term 
developments
Display and sensor materials 

  OLED colour conversion can be 
achieved with CFQD® quantum 
dot materials allowing for the 
development of hybrid display 
devices, combining the improved 
colour gamut capabilities of 
quantum dots with the superior 
blacks achievable with current 
OLED TVs.

  Near infra-red (“NIR”) materials 
can be used to revolutionise the 
sensor market extending the 
range of CMOS camera sensors 
from the visible through to the 
near IR. This would open up 
consumer device cameras to 
allow depth sensing on top of 
traditional photography all from 
a single sensor array.

  Short wave infra-red (“SWIR”) 
materials will have a large 
impact in the machine vision 
sector by providing a low cost 
alternative to traditional InGaAs 
technology sensors. Reduction of 
cost of these sensors opens up a 
wide range of potential uses from 
inspection of food materials 
on factory production lines to 
improved diagnostic capabilities 
of wearable devices, such as 
a smart watch. 

R&D

  µLED colour conversion can be 
used to truly enable wearable 
augmented reality (“AR”) devices 
in the near future. CFQD® 
quantum dots will be capable 
of converting single colour blue 
µLED projectors to full RGB 
capability, allowing full colour 
images to be displayed on heads 
up displays at high brightness 
with low power consumption.

  QD-LED self-emissive display 
technology can uniquely offer 
excellent colour performance, 
high brightness, and power 
efficiency alongside low cost 
printing production techniques. 
Displays with novel form factors, 
flexible or large area printable 
displays hold great potential for 
the next generation of screens.

Our markets

p3

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 015

Our business model

We are focused on bringing our platform 
technology to market for our partners and 
customers through innovation and research

EMPLO

Y

E

E

S

A
N
D
C
U
S
T
O
M
E

P
A
R
T
N
E
R
L

I

C
E
N
S

R

E

S

E

S

ERTIS E

P
X
E

ATF O

L
P

R M   TECHN

O

L

O

G

Y

INTELLECTUAL 
PROPERTY

A

GILITY

N S

T I O

A

R

E

O P

016

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Intellectual 
property
Deep IP portfolio, 
a key investment 
proposition 

Platform 
technology 
High performing 
nanomaterials

Expertise

Our platform and people 
deliver novel solutions to 
new application challenges

Agility

Broad skill set and agile 
team structures enable rapid 
resource pivot to alternative 
commercial opportunities

Licence partner 

Major channel partners 
with global reach to multiple 
markets and applications

Employees

Highly skilled staff with 
extensive technical knowledge 
and flexible skill set

Production capacity 

Installed asset base capable 
of generating significant 
revenue in multiple markets

Strategic report 
 
About our business model

Our business model has a 

number of key strengths. It 
also enjoys a diverse range 
of potential income streams. 
This was amply demonstrated over the 
last two years where services income 
featured strongly compared to previous 
years. Our medium-term goal is to 
maximise our revenue from direct 
product sales by Nanoco and also 
through royalty income on sales by 
our channel partners.

Intellectual property (“IP”)

IP and process technology know-how are 
foundational assets for the Group and a 
key strength. Our technology is heavily 
patented to secure its use for the Group. 
New IP is continually generated through 
our R&D activities and all potential 
patents are reviewed by our internal 
Patent Review Board for commercial 
value before being filed.

It is worth noting that on top of our 
formal IP portfolio, we also have 
significant know-how around our 
methods and processes. We tend to hold 
this information as commercial secrets 
rather than as formally registered IP.

Platform technology

Licence partners

Our nanomaterials have a wide range of 
electronic properties, usually opto-electrical 
in nature. These include absorption of 
different forms of energy and its emission 
and potentially its conversion to a different 
form of energy (electricity to light, for 
example) or a different variety of the 
same energy (blue light to green light, 
for example).

One specific class of our materials is our 
CFQD® quantum dots that avoid the use 
of toxic cadmium in display applications. 
The same absence of toxic chemicals 
means we can also develop dots that 
can be applied in life sciences applications 
for use in the human body.

Expertise and agility

We take advantage of our extensive 
technical expertise and agile workforce 
to be able to respond to complex and 
challenging customer requirements. We 
can also do this much faster than many 
of our competitors. The example of the 
US Customer is a case in point: within eleven 
months of starting work, we solved a 
number of technical challenges to develop 
and scale up a novel nanomaterial and 
then built a new production facility capable 
of manufacturing that new nanomaterial 
(once the facility is commissioned 
and validated).

Our licence partners create an excellent 
opportunity for the Group to access very 
large global markets that our own scale 
might make difficult. Our partners have 
global scale and reach and in a number 
of cases are closer to potential end market 
uses that might go unnoticed by the Group.

Our licence partners also bring significant 
skill sets in the respective supply chains 
that would be too difficult or too costly 
for the Group to develop internally. This 
partner reach has allowed the Group to 
move to the “dot only” strategy where we 
focus our expertise and resources on our 
core capabilities and allow the licence 
partners to exploit their core strengths in 
collaboration with Nanoco.

Employees

Our staff are highly skilled in a number of 
specialist areas. There are 14 employees 
with PhDs and other postgraduate 
qualifications. In R&D our expertise 
ranges from chemistry to physics, and 
from biology to pharmacology. Staff are 
also adept at taking lab scale process 
and scaling them up to industrial 
production scale. We also have 
strong process improvement and yield 
optimisation skills that improve both 
production volumes and our input costs. 
It is this extensive range of specialist skills 
which makes our team such a valuable 
asset which, when combined with our IP 
portfolio, helps generate a compelling 
investment proposition.

Production capacity

Our Runcorn production facility has 
two distinct production labs. One is 
focused on CFQD® quantum dots for 
use in display, lighting and life sciences. 
The other, new and recently completed 
facility, is focused on nanomaterials 
for use in infra-red sensing applications. 
In combination they create an extensive 
revenue-generating capacity for the 
Group through direct product sales 
to our customers. The nature of the 
facilities means they also deliver strong 
operational leverage if additional 
volumes are added with additional shifts.

ABOVE:
Operator assessing the performance of test devices manufactured 

with Nanoco Heatwave™ material designed for use in infra-red sensors.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 017

Our strategy

Our “dot only” strategy is to focus on producing 
the highest quality dots and meeting the needs 
of our customers through the application of 
innovative nanomaterials technology

Strategic 
objectives

1

Growth

2

Investment

3

Licensing

Objective

Objective

Objective

  To become self-sustaining 

  To maintain our 

financially

competitive advantage 

  To continue to invest in 
R&D for future products

  To bring significant extra 
capacity and resources  
to address expected 
market growth

How

How

How

  Own manufacture and 

direct supply to customers

  Non-exclusive 

technology licensing

  Professional services

  Royalty income 

  Continue to create 
and patent new IP

  Continue to develop 

in-house manufacturing 
capabilities

  Assisting licensees 
in maximising their 
opportunities in 
manufacturing

  Working with licensees 

to create routes to market 
for our products

Future focus

Future focus

Future focus

  Converting current 
opportunities into 
revenues with a strong 
emphasis on nanomaterials 

  Continuing to invest in 
R&D in order to remain 
at the forefront of 
this technology

  Continuing to support 
our licensing partners 
to maximise the benefit 
to all parties

  Exploring opportunities 

  Exploring ways to open up 

  Giving partners the best 

with a number of 
potential customers

new market opportunities

performing dots 

KPIs

KPIs

KPIs

  Year-end cash and cash 

  Year-end cash and cash 

burn rate

  Revenue

  Loss after tax

  Total billings

Risks

  Strategic

  Operational

  Financial

burn rate

  Total investment 
in research and 
development

Risks

  Strategic

  Compliance

  Portfolio of patents 

and patents pending

Risks

  Strategic

018

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportStrategy in action
Investment in manufacturing this year 
has seen a major increase in our capacity 
for direct product sales

We built and commissioned a significant 
new production facility at our Runcorn 
site in the UK. The facility doubles the 
production area of our Runcorn site. 
More importantly, the new facility has 
the potential to generate revenue in 
excess of £100m p.a. if fully loaded on 
maximum shifts (based on current price 
and yield expectations).

We continue to work to improve routing 
times and material yields to push 
production capacity further still.

On the CFQD® plant we have also been 
developing plans to expand our 

capacity for direct production. This has 
been in partnership with our R&D and 
scale up teams where new generations 
of higher performing dots have been 
developed which lead to higher yields 
and lower input costs for our display 
materials. We estimate that we have 
doubled the volume capacity of the 
plant and with a small number of 
additional capital investments could 
push this to a fourfold increase in volume.

This will be useful in both being able to 
meet higher demand but also in being 
able to mitigate pressure for cost downs 
in the industry.

RIGHT:
A selection of 
Nanoco products.

£100.0m

  Revenue capacity in IRQD 

facility (sensing)

£30.0m

  Revenue capacity 

in CFQD® facility (display)

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 019

Our key performance indicators

We have continued our drive to make sure all employees 
are aware of, and focused on, our key performance 
metrics, making our performance a true team effort

Year-end cash and  
cash burn rate
£ million

£5.2m
-26%

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

Revenue
£ million

£3.9m
-46%

LBITDA
£ million

(£2.9m)1
-23%

5.2

7.0

10.7

5.7

9.5

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

3.9

7.1

3.3

1.3

0.5

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

(2.9)

(3.8)

(6.2)

(9.5)

(11.2)

Measurement

Measurement

Measurement

Reconciled bank balances including 
committed but not yet cleared 
receipts and payments.

The value of goods and services 
recognised as income in accordance 
with IFRS 15 Revenue Recognition.

Current monthly gross cash 
consumption before revenues and 
other receipts.

Why it is important

The business operates on a cash 
consuming basis and this blended 
KPI indicates the duration of 
funding visibility.

What it means

In combination with the Group’s 
operating plans and budgets, the 
current balance underpins the 
Directors’ going concern and 
viability statements.

Why it is important

Revenue (and its change year on 
year) shows the speed with which the 
business is growing or contracting.

What it means

In combination with gross margins 
and overheads it shows whether the 
Group is getting closer to a 
breakeven position.

The statutory result after deducting 
exceptional items, share based 
payment charges, depreciation, 
amortisation, interest and tax from 
our revenue.

Why it is important

Reducing LBITDA is a critical 
medium-term goal as it would 
significantly reduce the key risk of 
running out of cash before realising 
the Group’s full potential.

What it means

The Group’s LBITDA has reduced 
year on year, bringing the Group 
closer to cash flow neutral 
and sustainability.

1 

 After impact of IFRS 16 in current year. 

See note 3 to the financial statements.

Strategy link

1

2

Strategy link

1

Strategy link

1

020

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportKey

Strategy link

1

2

3

Growth

Investment

Licensing

Billings
£ million

£2.5m
-74%

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

Investment in R&D
£ million

£3.1m
-28%

2.5

9.6

6.5

1.1

1.9

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

3.1

4.4

4.0

5.5

6.0

Portfolio of patents  
and patents pending
Number of patents

731
-2%

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

731

745

654

600

467

Measurement

Measurement

Measurement

The value of invoices raised during 
the year for goods and services 
delivered or to be delivered to 
customers (excluding VAT).

The sum of all costs incurred in 
research and development activities. 
This includes salary costs and other 
direct R&D costs.

The Group’s IP lawyers report 
monthly on patents granted or filed 
in the respective patent offices in 
various countries.

Why it is important

Why it is important

Why it is important

Billings are a better indicator 
of cash flow than revenue, as 
revenue can be influenced by 
non-cash accounting estimates 
and judgements.

What it means

Billings in the year were significantly 
down reflecting the fall in revenue 
and also the fact that some FY20 
revenue was invoiced in FY19. The 
team is working to win new business 
and restore billings to a healthier 
position.

Nanoco prides itself on the scale 
and quality of our R&D efforts – 
which feed our IP portfolio and also 
commercial opportunity pipeline as 
we develop new materials for 
potential new markets and 
applications.

What it means

We aim to continue investment 
in our core R&D activities despite 
restructuring the business during 
the year. In this way we will further 
enhance the quality of our materials.

Our IP portfolio is a key strength 
of Nanoco and a strong reason to 
invest. It supports our efforts to 
monetise our investments in R&D 
and also underpins the major 
litigation against Samsung.

What it means

The overall quality of our IP portfolio 
continues to improve. We continue 
to review the portfolio for relevance 
and value. As our business focus 
changes this can lead to a decision 
to allow no longer relevant IP 
to lapse.

Strategy link

1

Strategy link

2

3

Strategy link

2

3

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 021

Financial review

Maintaining commercial 
and operational focus 
with a lower fixed cost base

Revenue and other operating 

income decreased by £3.3 million 
to £4.0 million (2019: £7.3 million). 
The decrease is largely due to 

the lower revenues from the US Customer.

BRIAN TENNER
Chief Executive Officer 
(Formerly Chief Operating Officer 
and Chief Financial Officer)

Summary

  Cash remains the key point of focus 

– the fundraise pre-year end provided 
£3.2 million net of costs, increasing 
cash to £5.2 million at year end.

  We continue to monitor our cost base, 
and have cut our monthly cash burn 
rate to approximately £0.4 million.

  Revenue and other operating income 
decreased by 45% to £4.0 million 
(2019: £7.3 million).

  Billings decreased by £7.1 million to 
£2.5 million (2019: £9.6 million), due 
to the end of the contract with the 
US Customer.

  The loss before tax increased 
by £0.5 million to £6.0 million 
(2019: £5.5 million) largely due 
to increases in depreciation 
and amortisation and various 
one-off costs.

Revenue from the sale of products and 
services rendered accounted for 89% 
(2019: 94%) of revenues with the balance 
being royalty and licence income. 
Revenue from the sale of products 
was £0.4 million (2019: £0.2 million).

Billings have significantly decreased by 
£7.1 million to £2.5 million (2019: £9.6 million), 
which reflects the end of the contract 
with the US Customer.

Revenue from royalties and licences does 
not have a directly associated cost of 
sale. Service income also has a lower 
cost of sale. Cost of sales decreased by 
£0.4 million to £0.3 million (2019: £0.7 million) 
as a result of the fall in revenue and change 
in sales mix.

Research and development expenditure 
is below prior year at £3.1 million. The 
largest reduction was due to the fall in 
payroll costs. Total payroll costs in the 
year were £4.2 million (2019: £5.6 million). 
The decrease is due to:

  the full year impact of the prior year 

restructuring (£0.6 million);

  headcount reductions during the year 

(£0.4 million); and

Highlights

Turnover

Adjusted operating loss

Adjusted LBITDA

Net loss

Loss per share

Billings

Cash and cash equivalents

022

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

  the benefits of a Company-wide pay 
cut and the Government’s furlough 
scheme (£0.4 million).

In March 2020, we announced a further 
consultation with all employees. The 
consultation is now complete and the 
resulting business will have c.45 full time 
employees (2019: 72) once the final changes 
are made. The revised structure reduces 
our cost base, whilst ensuring we still have 
operational and commercial viability.

In July 2020, we launched a fundraise 
which was over-subscribed and resulted 
in £3.2 million of cash inflow (net of fees). 
Cash at year end was £5.2 million, which 
reflects a £5.0 million consumption of 
cash before the impact of the fundraise.

Non-GAAP measures

The non-GAAP measures of adjusted 
operating loss and adjusted loss 
before interest, tax, amortisation and 
share-based payment charges (“LBITDA”) 
are provided in order to give a clearer 
understanding of the underlying loss for 
the year that reflects cash outflow from 
the business.

2020
£ million

2019
£ million

% change

3.9

(4.8)

(2.9)

(5.1)

(1.76)

2.5

5.2

7.1

(5.0)

(3.8)

(4.4)

(1.52)

9.6

7.0

(46%)

(4%)

(23%)

17%

13%

74%

(26%)

Strategic reportCash flow and balance sheet 

Foreign exchange management

During the year cash, cash equivalents, 
deposits and short-term investments 
decreased to £5.2 million (2019: £7.0 million). 
The net cash outflow, excluding the 
benefits of the equity raise of £3.2 million 
in July 2020 (net of costs), was £5.0 million 
(2019: £3.7 million outflow). The increase 
was driven by lower revenues from the 
US Customer. 

The Group invoices most of its revenues 
in Sterling and also has US Dollar and 
Euro revenues. The Group is therefore 
exposed to movements in those currencies 
relative to Sterling. The Group will use 
forward currency contracts to fix the 
exchange rate on invoiced or confirmed 
foreign currency receipts should the amount 
become significant and more predictable.

Tax credits of £1.1 million (2019: £1.4 million) 
were received during the year.

Expenditure incurred in registering patents 
totalled £0.6 million (2019: £1.0 million) 
reflecting the Group’s continued focus 
on developing and registering intellectual 
property. Capitalised patent spend is 
amortised over ten years in line with the 
established Group accounting policy.

Treasury activities and policies

The Group manages its cash deposits 
prudently. Cash deposits are regularly 
reviewed by the Board and cash 
forecasts are updated monthly to ensure 
that there is sufficient cash available for 
foreseeable requirements.

More details on the Group’s treasury 
policies are provided in note 28 to the 
financial statements.

Credit risk

The Group only trades with recognised, 
creditworthy third parties. Receivable 
balances are monitored on an ongoing 
basis and any late payments are promptly 
investigated to ensure that the Group’s 
exposure to bad debts is not significant.

There were no open forward contracts as 
at 31 July 2020 (2019: none). The Group’s 
net profit and equity are exposed to 
movements in the value of Sterling relative 
to the US Dollar. The indicative impact 
of movements in the Sterling exchange 
rate on profits and equity based on 
the retranslation of the closing balance 
sheet is summarised in note 28 to the 
financial statements and was based 
on the year-end position.

Brexit

The Board continues to monitor the 
proposals being made. Currently, the 
majority of the Group’s revenues are for 
services delivered in the UK with minimal 
Brexit impact. Going forward, the Group 
expects a significant portion of its 
revenues from material sales to be from 
non-EU countries where the Government 
hopes to have in place equivalent 
trading arrangements as exist today.

Specific conditions for trade with EU 
countries will be put in place once the 
shape of any deal is known. As a point 
of note, WTO tariffs on our products 
are relatively low and not deemed to 
be a risk to our competitiveness.

The calculation of both non-GAAP 
measures is shown in the table below:

2020
£ million

2019
£ million

Operating loss 

(5.9)

(5.5)

Share-based 
payment charge

Exceptional costs

Adjusted  
operating loss

Depreciation1

Amortisation2

Adjusted LBITDA 

0.4

0.7

(4.8)

1.1

0.8

(2.9)

0.2

0.3

(5.0)

0.6

0.6

(3.8)

1 

Includes depreciation of right of use assets in 2020.

2  Includes impairment of intangible assets.

IFRS 16 Leases replaced IAS 17 Leases 
with effect from 1 August 2019. We 
present current year results on the new 
IFRS 16 basis but prior year comparatives 
on an IAS 17 basis. Under IFRS 16, the prior 
year adjusted LBITDA would have been 
£3.1 million. More details are disclosed 
in note 3(v) to the financial statements.

The loss before tax was £6.0 million 
(2019: £5.5 million).

Exceptional items 

Exceptional costs in the year related to 
the Formal Sales Process, the start of the 
litigation against Samsung, the fundraise 
and restructuring activities. They are set 
out in more detail in note 7 to the 
financial statements.

Taxation 

The tax credit for the year is £0.9 million 
(2019: £1.1 million). The tax credit to be 
claimed, in respect of R&D spend, is 
£0.9 million (2019: £1.1 million). Overseas 
corporation tax was £nil during the year 
(2019: £nil). There was no deferred tax 
credit or charge (2019: £nil). 

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 023

Financial review continued

Going concern

Summary

Whilst the news relating to the US 
Customer in the prior year was a 
commercial setback, since then we have 
announced a new project with ST Micro.

The Group has demonstrated its agility 
and ability to reduce its costs when 
needed a number of times over recent 
years. However, we have ensured 
we have continued operational and 
commercial ability to meet the needs 
of customers.

We launched our litigation against 
Samsung, which is fully financed and 
therefore no cash flow risk to the Group.

We are therefore confident that we have 
the means and the will to secure our 
medium-term future while our focus is 
firmly on pursuing near-term commercial 
opportunities.

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

The fundraise in July 2020 raised £3.2 million 
net of costs. This extended the Group’s 
cash runway to December 2022.

The Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group has 
access to adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future.

Accordingly they continue to adopt 
the going concern basis in preparing 
the consolidated financial statements 
and the Board concluded that it is 
appropriate to utilise the going 
concern assumption.

Covid-19 pandemic

The Group has completed detailed 
risk assessments and implemented the 
resulting action plans and Government 
guidance to create Covid-19 secure 
workplaces. We are able to meet 
customer needs while working in a 
safe fashion. The Group will continue to 
access financial support where available 
and appropriate. We do not currently 
expect significant financial downsides 
though this is clearly dependent on 
changes in regulations and the scale 
of any further lockdowns.

“ Cash remains 
our key focus 
and constraint, 
and therefore 
we continue 
to explore 
cost saving 
opportunities 
whilst ensuring 
we deliver for 
our customers.”

Cash and cash equivalents
£ million

2020

2019

5.2

7.0

Net decrease in cash explained by:

Investment in capital spend
£ million

2020

2019

0.2

2.1

The need to invest in capital spend 
has decreased, following completion 
of Runcorn facility in prior year.

Investment in intellectual property
£ million

2020

2019

0.6

1.0

Considerate rationalisation of the 
patents has resulted in a decrease 
in patents granted and patents 
pending from 745 to 731.

R&D tax credit received
£ million

2020

2019

1.1

1.4

Our continued emphasis on 
R&D has resulted in a tax claim 
of £1.1 million (2019: £1.4 million) 
being repaid in the year.

Cash outflow from operating activities
£ million

2020

2019

3.5

0.6

Cash outflow from operating 
activities has increased due to 
adverse working capital movements.

024

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties

Managing risk in a dynamic 
business environment 

In common with all businesses at 

Nanoco’s stage of development, the 
Group is exposed to a range of risks, 
some of which are not wholly within our 
control or capable of complete mitigation 
or protection through insurance.

Specifically, a number of the Group’s 
products and potential applications are 
at a research or development stage and 
hence it is not possible to be certain that 
a particular project or product will lead to 
a commercial application. Other products 
require further development work to confirm 
a commercially viable application.

Equally, a number of products are 
considered commercially viable but 
have yet to see demand for full scale 
production. It is also the case that the 
Group is often only one part of a long 
and complex supply chain for new 
product applications. The Group 
therefore has little visibility of demand 
other than from contracts already in 
place. There are therefore a range of risks 
that are associated with the different 
stages of product development as well 
as for the Group as a whole.

Likelihood and impact 
of principal risks

B

D

G

H

C

A

h
g
H

i

S
E
S

I
L
L
A
T
S
Y
R
C
K
S

I

R
F
I

T
C
A
P
M

I

w
o
L

E

I

F

J

Low 

PROBABILITY OF 
RISK CRYSTALLISING

High

Risk management process

The Board has established a process for 
carrying out a robust risk assessment that 
evaluates and manages the principal risks 
faced by the Group. The Board reviews 
the process. A detailed review of 
individual risks was undertaken by the 
Audit Committee during the financial year 
ended 31 July 2020. The Board has also 
established an acceptable level of risk 
(risk appetite) that informs the scale and 
urgency of actions required. Where risks 
are deemed to be outside management 
control, efforts are focused on mitigating 
any potential impact. Where all practical 
measures to prevent or mitigate risks have 
been taken and a residual element of risk 
still remains, these risks are accepted by 
the Group.

Risks are evaluated with respect to 
the probability of occurrence and the 
potential impact if a risk crystallised. 
Where the Group has identified risks, 
these are monitored with controls and 
action plans to reduce the probability of 
a risk crystallising and the impact of each 
potential event if it did occur. The residual 
risk score, after mitigating controls, is then 
plotted on a “risk heat map”. The Group’s 
principal risks are shown on the heat map 
below and are discussed in further detail 
in the pages following.

Principal overarching risk

The principal overarching strategic risk 
faced by the business is that the Group 
exhausts its available funding before 
achieving adequate levels of commercial 
revenues and cash flows to be self-funding.

This risk has been significantly mitigated 
in the short to medium term by the recent 
equity fundraising which has extended the 
Group’s cash runway to December 2022. 
This date can be extended for the 
operational side of the business with each 
new business win. In a worst case scenario 
with no new business wins, the date can 
still be delivered though this would require 
further significant restructuring. Experience 
in 2019 and 2020 shows that the Board is 
ready and able to take prompt action to 
reduce costs should the need arise.

“key customer reliance” as a result of 
the scale of the contract with the US 
Customer. This risk crystallised in the 
fourth quarter of FY19 with the decision 
by the US Customer not to sign a 
new contract.

The relationship with ST Microelectronics 
N.V. is also important but it is smaller in 
scale and therefore less concentrated 
a risk than with the US Customer. This 
is partly mitigated by new customer 
relationships developed during the year.

Commercial negotiations continue to 
secure new customers and revenues 
to reduce our reliance on a single 
big customer.

Other principal risks

Risks are broadly categorised as 
strategic, operational, financial or 
compliance. The table overleaf focuses 
on those risks that the Directors believe 
are the most important currently faced by 
the business. Other risks may be unknown 
at present and some that are currently 
rated as low risk could become more 
material risks in the future. The Group’s risk 
management process tracks risks as they 
evolve and change.

New principal risk in FY20 (D)

The Group has now initiated litigation 
against Samsung for wilful infringement 
of its IP. The Group is therefore exposed 
to the related positive and negative 
aspects of the litigation. Winning the 
litigation could create a significant 
increase in value for the Group in terms of 
any award or settlement but also in terms 
of increasing the likelihood of other future 
valuable licensing of the Group’s IP.

Conversely, if the litigation is unsuccessful, 
this could undermine the perceived value 
in the Group’s IP portfolio. The cost risk of 
the litigation if Samsung aims to delay 
and/or extend the length of the process 
has been significantly mitigated by the 
third party funding agreement that has 
been put in place whereby a large US 
litigation funding specialist pays the 
costs of the litigation.

In FY18, the Group became exposed to 
a new risk that potentially had a direct 
impact on its financial stability, namely 

In either case (successful or unsuccessful), 
the Board will initiate a further review of 
the future strategy of the business.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 025

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Principal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk description

Potential causes and impact

Mitigation

Change

Link to 
strategy Appetite

Strategic

A

Weak adoption or 
further significant 
delays of CFQD® 
products in the 
display market

Responsibility:

CEO

B

Customer 
concentration risk

Responsibility:

CEO

C

Rapid product 
commoditisation

Responsibility:

CEO

D

Intellectual 
property and IP 
lawsuit with 
Samsung

Responsibility:

CEO/CTO

Operational

E

Meeting product 
specifications

Responsibility:

CEO

Any of the following factors would have 
a potentially adverse impact on the 
Group’s prospects:

Actively pursue “dot only” strategy 
which is less reliant on any single 
particular application.

  Nanoco technology does not become 

fully accepted by the market;

  drawn-out qualification processes 

by display customers;

  stronger than anticipated competition 

from non-CFQD® solutions;

  Samsung dominates the display 
market, vertically integrated, 
inhibiting access to the market; and

  licence partners are slow to 

generate their own sales with a 
knock-on effect on Nanoco royalties.

Reliance on a small number of key 
customers exposes the Group to risk of 
delays in the customer’s own supply 
chain over which the Group can exert 
limited influence (one customer was 
64% of revenue in FY20). These delays 
can then have a knock-on adverse 
effect on the Group’s expected 
revenue streams.

High technical sales engagement 
with all the major display OEM 
brands and all parts of the display 
supply chain.

Working actively to expedite 
customer approvals processes.

Rapid product development.

Cross training of teams to ensure 
flexibility to serve different markets 
and customers reduces risk of excess 
cost base.

Commercial strategy in the 
medium term is to dilute customer 
concentration risk by selling 
into various markets, through 
various channels and to a range 
of customers.

Overcapacity for CFQD® products leads 
to price and profit margin erosion.

Phased capacity expansion 
available at Runcorn facility.

Reduce time to market of new 
CFQD® products.

Competitors unlawfully infringing 
Nanoco’s IP.

Nanoco constantly scans the market 
for signs of infringement.

Success in the Samsung litigation will 
create value; failure may reduce value.

Prosecute infringers – Samsung 
litigation.

Maintain process know-how 
as business secrets as opposed 
to patents.

Technical specifications are increasing 
as QD technology matures.

If Nanoco fails to meet specification 
then competitor products will 
be selected.

Active product life cycle 
management with new generations 
of each product to operate within 
new specifications.

Similar approach to production 
process improvements.

1

1

1

1

3

1

This risk increased 
overall during the year 
when Merck terminated 
its licence agreement 
with the Group. This was 
partly offset by a new 
customer application 
being developed 
and by the fact that 
quantum dots are now 
featuring on a wider 
price range of TVs which 
should stimulate demand.

This risk crystallised 
during the year with the 
completion of the US 
Customer contract. ST 
Microelectronics N.V. is 
a new large customer 
but is smaller in scale 
for Nanoco and hence 
the risk is less 
concentrated.

Volume will be 
stimulated with 
adoption in more TVs 
though we have seen 
price pressure to 
accompany this. 
Capacity expansion 
plans in place.

We monitor potential 
infringement of our IP. 
We also continue to file 
patents to protect new 
R&D outcomes where 
appropriate.

During the year we 
passed the technical 
specifications for our 
new nanomaterials.

We have also enhanced 
the performance of our 
CFQD® quantum dots.

026

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Key

Risk change

Strategy

Appetite

Up

Neutral

Down

1

2

3

Growth

Acceptable

Investment

Review

Licensing

Unacceptable

Risk description

Potential causes and impact

Mitigation

Change

Link to 
strategy Appetite

Operational continued

F

Manufacturing 
capacity is unable 
to fulfil customer 
demand

Responsibility:

CEO

G

Loss of key 
personnel

Responsibility:

CEO

Financial

H

Lack of adequate 
resources to sustain 
the Group until it 
becomes self-
sustaining

Responsibility:

CEO

Compliance

I

Major 
environmental, 
health and safety 
(“EHS”) issue

Responsibility:

CEO

J

Legislation to ban 
cadmium in displays 
is delayed (RoHS 
Exemption 39)

Responsibility:

CEO

Customer markets are large and a 
significant demand request would 
require additional capacity. Failure 
to meet demand could harm 
commercial relationships.

Capacity flexibility can be delivered 
by additional shifts, use of scale-up 
labs for smaller overrun quantities and 
access to tolling manufacturers and 
also to licensee production capacity.

Conservative plant design to reduce 
technical risks. Accelerating R&D 
trials with extended hours working.

1

3  

Manufacturing capacity 
significantly increased 
with the new Runcorn 
facility and major 
process improvements.

While the Group maintains a high level 
of protected documented IP, our staff 
remain a critical asset with significant 
levels of technical and sector know-how. 
Loss of key personnel would have 
an adverse impact on the Group’s 
development and commercialisation. 

The Group offers rewarding careers 
that allow staff to develop new skills 
while pursuing interesting research ideas.

The Group reviews remuneration 
to ensure that appropriate reward 
packages accompany the fulfilling 
work environment.

Revenues from own product sales, 
services rendered and licensee 
royalties do not materialise as planned.

The Group is unable to carry out its 
operations and hence cannot deliver 
on medium-term or strategic goals.

Cash will continue to be 
prudently managed.

Focus on revenue-generating 
activities without abandoning 
worthwhile and focused R&D work.

Cost reduction actions identified 
if necessary.

Failure to follow existing procedures or 
a new unforeseen risk could result in 
injury to staff, equipment, reputation 
and finances and potential loss of 
operating licences.

Extensive and ongoing efforts to 
continuously improve procedures.

Renewed leadership focus on the 
“tone at the top” and cultural change.

Continuous training of staff in risks 
and how to mitigate risks.

Cadmium-based quantum dots 
(“CdQDs”) are a key competitive 
product and any delay to them being 
phased out adversely impacts the 
Group’s ability to generate revenues 
in the estimated timescales.

The use of cadmium-based 
quantum dots was to be phased out 
in Europe in October 2019 (subject to 
appeals for an extension). 

1

1

2

1

2

Staff redundancies 
during the year increased 
uncertainty for the team. 
The equity fundraise will 
help to create a more 
stable environment.

Material new business 
wins, third party funding 
for the Samsung litigation 
and the equity fundraise 
give a much more stable 
cash flow platform for 
the medium term.

Performance on safety 
has been good this 
year with an increase 
in the number of safety 
opportunities identified 
in a growing number 
of leadership audits.

Nanoco and other 
industry players 
responded to the most 
recent request for views 
on a further extension. 
The result of the extension 
request is awaited. The 
ban will not come into 
place until a decision 
is reached.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 027

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Viability statement

The Directors have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group has access to adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future

In accordance with the provisions 

in the UK Corporate Governance 
Code (C.2.2 of the 2018 revision), the 
Directors have assessed the viability 

of the Group’s business model and 
determined that a two-year period 
continues to be a suitable period to be 
utilised. A two-year period is considered 
appropriate given the rapidly evolving 
nature of the markets for the Group’s 
products. As noted in the section 
on principal risks and uncertainties, 
market wide adoption of quantum dot 
technology is still in its infancy and, until 
well established in multiple applications, 
forecasting time horizons will be 
necessarily short.

The Directors’ assessment has been 
made with reference to the current 
position of the Group, the Group’s current 
strategy and principal risks as described 
in this Strategic report.

This assessment also includes the 
potential impact of a no deal Brexit 
and ongoing safety measures to ensure 
staff can work safely in a "Covid secure" 
environment or in the event of a 
second lockdown.

Customer had been a key source of 
revenue and cash for the previous two 
years. The Group has taken steps to win 
new business to replace the revenues 
from the US Customer and has had some 
success, though not on the same scale.

Changes during the year

The Samsung litigation represents a 
potentially significant upside opportunity 
but one that the Group would not 
have been able to pursue with its own 
resources. Securing third party funding 
means that the opportunity can be 
pursued without any drain or risk to 
the Group’s financial reserves since the 
funder will only see a return of its capital 
if a judgement or settlement is made 
in Nanoco’s favour.

We announced in the fourth quarter of 
FY19 that the US Customer would not 
extend the contract then in place when 
it finished in December 2019. The US 

We have taken significant steps to 
reduce the size and monthly cash costs 
of the Group to partly offset this fall in 
revenue. This includes accessing the 
Government’s Coronavirus Employment 
Support scheme. 

Having taken the actions noted above to 
reduce cash outflows and win new business, 
we then issued equity to shareholders in 
the last month of the year to strengthen 
the Group’s balance sheet and ensure 
that the Group remained a going concern. 
The fundraise was over-subscribed and 
additional funds were raised above the 
initial target. This extends the Group’s 
cash runway further to the end of 
December 2022.

The viability assessment process

In assessing the viability of the Group, the Directors have utilised their forecasts for the period to 31 July 2022 which take into 
account the Group’s current and expected business activities, current cash resources (£5.2 million as at 31 July 2020), the 
contracted revenue for FY21, and the principal risks and uncertainties it faces. These inputs were then used to create a 
reasonably plausible downside stress test which included:

Minimal CFQD® 
quantum dots sales 
(whether due to lower 
customer demand or 
supply chain issues with 
the Group’s channel 
partners)

An early end 
to the ST Micro 
contract - before 
commercial production 
revenues or before 
a second sensing 
customer is 
created

The Group’s ability 
to reduce costs in 
a timely manner

Continued support 
of our IP portfolio

028

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportA two-year time horizon creates scope 
to win new business and production 
revenues that could allow the Group 
to become self-financing. It is also a 
reasonable possibility that the outcome 
of the Samsung lawsuit could be known 
in this timeframe.

A "worst case" downside sensitivity 
analysis has been performed wherein 
the Group wins no more new revenues 
beyond those already under contract. 
In this downside scenario, significant 
management action would be required 
to reduce the Group’s cost base and 
capital expenditure. However, even in the 
worst case, the Group can take action to 
protect our core IP assets while retaining 
viability as an ‘IP shell’ while the Samsung 
lawsuit continues.

Conclusion

As a result of the assessment outlined 
above, the Directors have confirmed that 
they have a reasonable expectation that 
the Group will remain viable and able to 
continue in operation and meet liabilities 
as they fall due over the two-year period 
of their assessment.

Going concern

All of the following matters are taken into 
account by the Directors in forming their 
assessment of going concern:

  The Group’s business activities and 
market conditions are set out on 
pages 2 to 19.

  The principal risks and uncertainties 

are shown on pages 25 to 27.

  The Group’s financial position is 
described in the Financial review 
on pages 22 to 24.

  Note 28 to the accounts summarises 

the Group’s financial risk management 
objectives, policies and processes.

The Group funds its day-to-day cash 
requirements from existing cash reserves. 
As is common with businesses at a similar 
stage of development, the Group does 
not currently have access to any 
debt facilities.

For the purposes of their going concern 
assessment and the basis for the 
preparation of the 2020 Annual Report, 
the Directors have reviewed the same 
trading and cash flow forecasts and 
sensitivity analyses that were used by 
the Group in the viability assessment 
as noted earlier in this report. The same 
base case and downside (worst case) 
sensitivities were also used.

The base case represents the Board’s 
current expectations. Assumptions in 
the base case are:

  the development programme with ST 
Micro is successful and subsequently 
leads to scale-up of the product and 
thereafter to small scale commercial 
production in a relatively low 
volume application;

  small scale production of a second, 
already developed, product for use 
in infra-red sensing devices;

  commercial contracts are based on 
the existing pipeline of opportunities 
or agreements already under 
negotiation in display and 
sensing applications;

  no revenue is assumed from other 
business lines though some small 
scale commercial deals are currently 
under discussion;

  the Group’s variable costs remain 

in line with manufacturing activities;

  the overhead base benefits 

from £0.6 million of savings in FY21 
(£0.8 million on an annualised basis) 
following the restructuring exercise 
in the first quarter of FY21;

  Board costs are significantly reduced 
to reflect the scaled down size of the 
Board and Executive team at the end 
of third quarter of FY21;

  the Group remains eligible for R&D tax 

credits; and

  the installed cost base is capable 

of supporting significant increases in 
revenue above those assumed in the 
base case so there is no immediate 
requirement for short-term increases 
or new capital expenditure.

The base case indicates that the Group 
has more than sufficient cash throughout 
the period of the forecast.

However, the Board acknowledges that 
the base case includes an element of risk 
that some or all of these non-contracted 
projects may not convert to sales during 
the forecast period. Accordingly, the 
Board has considered the downside 
scenario in which no revenue, except that 
already contracted or under contractual 
negotiation, is achieved during the period.

In this downside scenario, management 
action to reduce the activities of the 
Group to an IP shell that supports the 
Samsung lawsuit allows the Group to 
maintain a cash runway to the end 
of 2022.

All of the potential cost savings are under 
the direct control of the Board and the 
Board has the ability and intention to 
make such changes on a timely basis 
if required.

Going concern conclusion

Considering the current financial 
resources and monthly cash costs of 
the Group, with potential for further 
mitigating action as noted above, and 
after making appropriate enquiries, the 
Directors have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group has access to adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future.

Accordingly they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the 
consolidated financial statements.

The financial statements do not reflect 
any adjustments that would be required 
to be made if they were prepared on a 
basis other than the going concern basis.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 029

Sustainability

Nanoco recognises that providing a safe, 
secure and healthy working environment 
is essential and contributes to productivity 
and improved performance

The Group recognises that, although 

its primary responsibility under UK 
corporate law is to its shareholders, 
it also has responsibilities towards 
its employees, customers, suppliers and 
also, ultimately, those consumers who 
benefit from its products, the broader 
public and the environment.

Health and safety 

Nanoco recognises that providing a safe, 
secure and healthy working environment 
is essential and contributes to productivity 
and improved performance. The health, 
safety and welfare of all of our employees, 
contractors and visitors is taken seriously 
across the entire organisation, with ultimate 
responsibility lying with the CEO. Health 
and safety performance is a standing 
item on each Board and Executive team 
agenda, and is also discussed within 
departmental meetings. The Group’s 
health and safety policy is reviewed 
annually. In addition, the Board has 
established an Environmental, Health 

and Safety (“EHS”) Committee to oversee 
the implementation of policy and involve 
staff in generating improvement plans.

v) 

There are various improvement and 
reporting systems in place to monitor 
the performance of the Group’s health 
and safety management system. 
These initiatives include:

i) 

ii) 

 reporting all incidents (including near 
misses) with appropriate ownership, 
root cause analysis and action 
tracking systems;

 communication of relevant topics 
and incidents via weekly toolbox 
talks to all departments;

iii)   monthly and quarterly leadership 

safety and observation audits with 
the focus on immediate action 
resolution by the executive or senior 
manager leading the audit;

iv)   monthly departmental audits with 

assigned action tracking processes 
in place to address issues;

 monthly health and safety reports 
issued across the organisation to 
communicate performance against 
annual metrics and progress on key 
improvement initiatives and projects;

vi)   annual health checks for staff, 

including tests for chemical exposure 
where required; and

vii)   annual occupational chemical 
exposure tests using fixed and 
personal monitors.

A risk assessment programme is in place 
to identify and mitigate the risks from our 
operations. These assessments include 
but are not limited to:

i) 

 the storage, handling and processing 
of hazardous substances;

ii) 

fire safety and emergency evacuation;

iii)   use of mechanical and electrical 

equipment; and

iv)   other workplace operations involving 
manual handling and ergonomic 
risks, working at height and other 
hazards identified as part of the EHS 
improvement programme.

Covid-19

Whilst essential work carried on at Nanoco through the 
lockdown period, staffing levels were much reduced due 
to the government’s staff retention scheme. Because of 
the EHS training which all managers and staff undergo, 
EHS standards were maintained and there was no impact 
on health and safety due to the reduction in numbers during 
affected periods. Measures were taken by the Company 
to address the risk of Covid-19 on the Company and 
employees, including but not limited to:

  PPE policies and protocols for prevention of infection;

  social distancing;

  shielding for vulnerable workers;

  login system for staff, and supervision by management 

which can be accessed remotely;

  liaising with the Employee Voice Committee to address 

any concerns; and

  risk assessments for both sites;

  return to work assessments for all employees.

030

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic reportWhole portfolio carbon generation (energy use)

2020 tCO2e

2019 tCO2e

Scope 2

Electricity

Natural gas

390

292

267

336

-13.1%

Intensity (tCO2e/average number 
of employees)
2020

2019

Change

9.8

7.7

+27.3%

Change

+46.1%

Scope 3

Air travel

22

104

-78.8%

Total

704

707

-0.4%

Data notes

Reporting period

Boundary

Reporting method 

1 August 2019 to 31 July 2020

Operational control

The Greenhouse Gas (“GHG”) Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard

Emissions factor source

Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy, Standard Set 2017

Data changes and restatements

None

All risk assessments are documented 
and actions assigned and reviewed 
according to the defined frequency. 
All research and development functions 
are actively encouraged to, wherever 
possible, eliminate or reduce the levels 
of hazardous substances used in our 
products and processes. All relevant 
chemical legislation and regulatory 
frameworks are used to assess the 
suitability of a substance prior to use 
as part of the risk assessment process. 
Standard operating procedures are 
documented and regularly reviewed.

All controlled documents are reviewed and 
approved via the electronic document 
management system. A health and 
safety induction programme is in place 
for all new staff and visitors/contractors 
performing work on our premises. Staff 
are trained in standard operating 
procedures, hazard awareness, generic 
workplace health and safety risks and 
behavioural safety expectations 
applicable to their role within the Group.

Each stakeholder has different interests, 
some of which are listed below:

Employees

Nanoco acknowledges its responsibilities 
for the health and safety of its employees, 
for their training and development 
and for treating them fairly. Further 
information about its employment 
policies is outlined overleaf.

Customers

Nanoco is responsible for the quality 
and safety of its products and for the 
performance of its research and 
development projects.

Shareholders

Nanoco seeks to increase shareholder 
value over the long term.

A serious H&S incident could jeopardise 
our “licence to operate” and threaten 
shareholder value.

A cross-functional employee health and 
safety team meets on a monthly basis 
with representation from all areas of the 
Group, including the Executive team. 
Effective inputs and outputs from the 
team are designed to facilitate a greater 
focus on health and safety and to 
actively encourage discussions within 
respective groups.

The Group has an excellent safety record 
and there has only been one reportable 
incident to the respective UK authorities 
across all our operations. Nanoco is 
committed to the continuous improvement 
of the health and safety management 
system. However, given the impact of 
Covid-19, we have not been able to 
complete our annual HSL safety survey.

Environment

Nanoco is committed to protecting the 
environment in which our activities are 
conducted. This commitment is directly 
expressed in our decision to develop our 

CFQD® quantum dot products to be free 
of toxic cadmium, which is still widely 
used by our competitors in their quantum 
dot products.

Nanoco has participated actively with 
regulators on the use of cadmium-based 
quantum dots in displays and LED light 
products. The European Commission 
(“EC”) is carrying out a review of requests 
to extend the duration and scope of the 
current RoHS exemption, which excludes 
lighting products and limits display 
products to 31 October 2019, after which 
the normal RoHS limit of 100ppm will 
apply. Nanoco has responded to the 
consultation to oppose any extensions. 
Nanoco continues to expect that 
regulations in other key markets, including 
China, will fall in line with RoHS in future.

Our contacts with display companies 
indicate that most already accept the 
need for new display products to be 
cadmium free – especially the world 
leading brands in television, computer 
monitor and laptop displays.

The Group’s environmental policy aims 
to foster a positive attitude towards the 
environment and to raise the awareness 
of employees towards responsible 
environmental practices at all sites 
operated by the Group. The Group 
endeavours to ensure compliance with 
all relevant legislation and regulatory 
requirements and, where practical and 
economically viable, standards are 
developed in excess of such requirements.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 031

Sustainability continued

Environment continued

Waste

The CEO has responsibility for reporting 
on relevant environmental matters 
to the Board. There have been no 
environmental incidents to report to 
the authorities across all our operations. 
Shareholders and other interested 
parties are encouraged to use the 
online version of the Annual Report 
and Accounts rather than requesting 
hard copies. Interested parties are 
encouraged to visit the Group’s website 
or use the regulatory news services 
instead of a hard copy. Employees 
are also encouraged to recycle paper, 
plastic, glass, cardboard and cans 
wherever possible.

Greenhouse gas (“GHG”) reporting 

Under the Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic and Directors’ Reports) 
Regulations 2013, the Group is required 
to state the annual quantity of emissions 
in tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent 
from activities for which the business is 
responsible, including the combustion 
of fuel and the operation of its facilities, 
and resulting from the purchase of 
electricity, heat, steam or cooling 
by the business for its own use.

As both of the Group’s UK premises are in 
multi-occupancy sites we place reliance 
upon their respective landlords to provide 
the data needed to determine emissions. 
Our laboratories require continuous 
negative pressure environments and, 
consequently, it is not possible to set 
realistic reduction targets in the 
consumption of electricity.

Our gas consumption is used for 
heating premises and site costs are 
shared between tenants on the basis 
of area of occupancy. In the absence 
of significant amounts of revenue from 
the sale of commercial products, the 
emissions of the business primarily arise 
from the occupation of its research and 
administration facilities rather than from 
revenue related production operations.

Emissions in respect of the Group’s US 
office are considered to be negligible. 
Our emissions, based on appropriate 
conversion factors published by the 
Department for Business, Energy & 
Industrial Strategy, for the current year 
are shown in the table on page 31.

During the year, the Group generated 
28.6 tonnes of waste (2019: 57.7 tonnes) 
and recycled 8.0 tonnes of this (2019: 46.8 
tonnes). The Group engages a specialist 
contractor to incinerate batches of 
chemicals and dispose of other materials 
no longer required. All waste contractors 
are assessed to ensure the waste 
hierarchy approach is applied to all of 
our materials handled, and that their 
operations and systems are compliant 
with the relevant legislation. Audits are 
performed every three years in line with 
our duty of care as a waste producer.

Other environmental matters

Consideration of the benefits to the 
environment is a significant factor in 
decisions regarding investments to 
upgrade the Group’s research and 
development facilities in Manchester 
and Runcorn.

Video conferencing is used where possible 
instead of physical travel in order to reduce 
the Group’s environmental footprint through 
fewer flights and other means of travel. 
This has also been imperative to the 
Group continuing operations during 
the existing Covid-19 pandemic.

The Group’s display, lighting and 
solar technologies all sit in the energy 
efficiency and low environmental impact 
arena and, as such, will enable customer 
companies to increase the uptake of 
their products while reducing their 
impact on the environment.

Attraction and retention

Recruiting technical specialists has 
always been key to Nanoco’s success. 
In a highly competitive market this means 
that we strive to offer a competitive benefits 
package and an attractive workplace 
culture to ensure that we attract and 
retain the best of the best. The number 
of long-serving employees demonstrates 
Nanoco’s ability to retain top talent; out 
of 68 employees at 31 July 2020, 21% had 
over ten years’ length of service and 
a further 26% had between five and ten 
years’ service.

Nanoco operates an employee referral 
scheme for recruiting new talent. Referrals 
from existing employees are a valued 
source of new recruits, typically introducing 
high quality candidates with a better 
cultural fit.

032

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

26%

21%

Employee 
length 
of service

53+

53%

Key

0-4 years

5-10 years

> 10 years

Nanoco has a comprehensive 
onboarding process for new joiners which 
includes H&S, HR, intellectual property, 
IT, finance and corporate induction 
sessions. The aim of this is to get 
employees engaged from their first day 
at Nanoco, and fully equipped to work 
towards Nanoco goals from the very 
beginning of their Nanoco career.

Employees with disabilities

It is Nanoco’s policy that people with 
disabilities, including job applicants and 
employees, should be able to participate 
in all of Nanoco’s activities fully on an 
equal basis with people who are not 
disabled. Nanoco strives to promote 
an environment free from discrimination, 
harassment and victimisation.

Nanoco has a disability inclusion policy 
that states that Nanoco will not, on the 
grounds of a person’s disability, or for 
a reason relating to a person’s disability, 
treat that person less favourably than 
it treats, or would treat, others to whom 
the same reason does not or would not 
apply, unless genuinely justified.

At the point of appointment, Nanoco 
obtains occupational health advice as 
to reasonable adjustments. For disabled 
employees we put together a “Reasonable 
Adjustment Action Plan” to support 
employees with disabilities or health 
conditions by removing or minimising 
workplace barriers. These plans are 
reviewed collaboratively between 
managers and employees to ensure that 
they remain relevant. Culturally, we believe 
that it is important to offer adjustments in 
a proactive manner where appropriate 
rather than waiting for our employees to 
request these.

Strategic report26
+
21
+
M
including events such as Mental Health 
Awareness Week, mindfulness sessions 
and charity events to raise awareness of 
the support available to those that suffer 
from mental health issues. We encourage 
an open door policy where employees 
are able to disclose and receive support 
for any mental health issues they may face.

The employee assistance programme, 
as part of the wellbeing policy, provides 
caring and compassionate support to help 
people cope and build resilience. Both 
telephone counselling and face-to-face 
counselling are available to all employees 
through the programme. This support 
aims to reduce absence and improve 
wellbeing by addressing issues head on 
and reducing their impact.

We believe that building a positive 
partnership between strategic 
management and the wider workforce 
is crucial to Nanoco’s success. Our 
people are our best problem solvers 
and possess the insight on how we 
can make Nanoco a top organisation 
to work for. A meaningful employee 
voice will support us as an organisation 
undergoing change and responding to 
industry changes. A direct link with the 
Board also enables our Board members 
to better understand the diverse nature 
of the Company, allowing them to 
execute their roles more effectively.

Recognition

Nanoco recognises that it has a duty 
to ensure the health, safety and welfare 
of its employees as far as reasonably 
practicable. This includes physical, 
mental and social wellbeing. It is also 
required to have in place measures to 
mitigate as far as practicable factors 
that could harm employees’ physical 
and mental wellbeing, which includes 
work related stress. 

Nanoco, as part of its wellbeing strategy, 
puts particular focus on mental health. 
It does so through a variety of means 

Engagement and wellbeing 

Communication channels at Nanoco 
include all-Company meetings, 
leadership meetings, and senior team 
meetings which then cascade information 
down. Communication media used 
includes the Group intranet, all-Group 
email briefings and online meeting 
software. Our line managers hold regular 
team meetings, cross-functional working 
group meetings and management 
one-to-one updates with their 
team members.

Nanoco is committed to a policy of 
engaging employees in the activities 
and growth of the Group. Human 
resources and senior management 
review communication channels via 
the use of employee surveys and plan 
communication activities to ensure 
employees are fully informed of current 
business strategy and financial results 
or corporate news.

Corporate communication is key to the 
engagement of our workforce. We have 
focused on improving the look, feel and 
content of Company-wide electronic 
communications in order to make these 
more engaging to employees. In order 
to help us communicate, measure and 
achieve our goals we use a process 
called objectives and key results (“OKRs”).

Aligning the entire Nanoco organisation 
to ensure that we focus on what is 
important to achieve our goals is critical 
to our success. In order to help us navigate 
the exciting opportunities in front of us it 
is crucial that as Nanoco employees and 
managers we make conscious, careful 
and informed choices about how we 
allocate our time and energy – as 
individuals and members of teams. 
OKRs are the result of those careful 
choices, and the means by which we 
co-ordinate the actions of individuals 
to achieve great collective goals.

We use OKRs to plan what people are 
going to produce, track their progress 
vs. plan, and co-ordinate priorities and 
milestones between people and teams. 
We also use OKRs to help people stay 
focused on the most important goals, 
and help them avoid being distracted 
by urgent but less important activities.

To improve our employee engagement, 
in 2019 we established the Employee 
Voice Committee, which allows employee 
representatives a forum to raise concerns 
and communicate directly with 
Board members.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 033

Sustainability continued

Gender diversity at Nanoco

Key

Female

Male

19%

27%

20%

All 
employees

81+

81% 80+

80% 73+

Board of 
Directors

Senior 
team

73%

Nationalities represented 
by our employees

11

The Group’s equal opportunities policy 
is reviewed annually and is available to 
employees on the Group intranet. A copy 
can be obtained upon request from the 
Company Secretary.

Ethics

Nanoco aims to demonstrate and 
promote high standards of honest and 
ethical conduct throughout the Group. 
Formal policies and procedures are 
reviewed annually and the policies listed 
below are available on the Group intranet 
or upon request from the Company 
Secretary. All Group employees are 
required to adhere to specified codes 
of conduct, policies and procedures, 
including, but not limited to the:

  anti-bribery and corruption policy;

  whistleblowing policy; and

  equal opportunities policy.

Nanoco is a member of the Chemical 
Industries Association (“CIA”) and applies 
the principles of Responsible Care® to all 
of its operations.

All Nanoco employees are required to 
complete annual training in the areas 
of cyber security, GDPR and information 
security to ensure they remain up to date 
and alert to the signs of fraud and 
unethical practices.

Equality and diversity

Racial and geographical diversity

The Group’s employees are from many 
different backgrounds, including eleven 
different nationalities: American, British, 
German, Irish, Indian, Italian, Lithuanian, 
Polish, Portuguese, Syrian and Ukrainian.

In addition, Group employees come from 
a range of business backgrounds, not 
purely research and development. Indeed, 
of the Board members, previous roles 
and responsibilities include those in the 
supply of chemicals and the engineering, 
electronics, life sciences, fast-moving 
consumer goods, publishing and 
financial industries.

Nanoco has business development 
people in America and the UK, also 
covering Europe and Asia. Increasingly 
Nanoco seeks individuals with 
experience in the business and 
geographic markets in which the Group 
operates in order to support its employees 
and job applicants equally. Nanoco will 
appoint, train, develop, reward and 
promote on the basis of merit and ability. 
Nanoco’s equal opportunities policy states 
that employees will not receive less 
favourable treatment or consideration 
on the grounds of age; disability; gender 
or gender reassignment; marriage and 
civil partnership status; pregnancy and 
maternity; race; religion or belief; sex; 
sexual orientation; or part-time status, 
nor will they be disadvantaged by any 
conditions of employment that cannot 
be justified as necessary on operational 
grounds relevant to the performance 
of the job.

034

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Strategic report19
+
M
20
+
M
27
+
M
Proportion of males and females in each income quartile

Gender pay gap

Upper quartile

82%

Upper middle quartile

72%

Lower middle quartile

94%

Lower quartile

76%

18%

28%

6%

24%

Key

Female

Male

Mean hourly earnings

Median hourly earnings

£29.03
Total1

£28.36
Male1

£31.87
Female1

1  Excluding NEDs.

£22.02
Total1

£22.06
Male1

£21.98
Female1

The median gender pay gap for all 
Nanoco employees excluding NEDs is 0% 
(2019: -2%). This means that for every £1 
the median man earns at Nanoco, the 
median woman earns £1 also. The 
National average pay gap in 2019 for 
all UK employees is 17.3%1. 

1 

 Source: Annual Survey of Hours and Earnings 

(“ASHE”) – Office for National Statistics.

On behalf of the Board

Dr Christopher Richards 
Chairman

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

Strategic report approval

The Strategic report on 
pages 6 to 35 incorporates:

  Chairman’s statement

  Chief Executive Officer’s statement

  Our business model

  Our strategy

  Key Performance Indicators

  Principal risks and uncertainties

  Viability statement

  Sustainability

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

Gender pay gap 

Scientific research is a sector challenged 
by a lack of gender diversity, but we 
feel that we have an opportunity to 
challenge this status quo. Nanoco 
believes in being an inclusive and diverse 
organisation where everyone is able to 
reach their full potential. The challenge in 
our organisation and across Great Britain 
is to eliminate any gender pay gap; we 
therefore voluntarily analysed gender 
pay gap data as at 31 March 2020. We 
can use these results to assess the levels 
of gender equality in our workplace and 
the balance of male and female 
employees at different levels.

At the snapshot date of 5 April 2020, 
Nanoco employed 71 employees 
(2019: 90) in the UK, of whom 20% 
were female (2019: 22%). Employees 
work across a variety of roles in research 
and production environments. 

Overall female representation across 
the quartile pay bands corresponds fairly 
closely to the percentage of female 
to male employees overall.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 035

Board of Directors

Our refocused Board comprises 
experienced and talented people from 
scientific, chemical, industrial and 
commercial backgrounds

Dr Christopher Richards

Brian Tenner

Non-Executive Chairman

Appointed
Chris was appointed Chairman of Nanoco Group 
plc in May 2016, having joined the Board as a 
Non-Executive Director in November 2015. 

Skills and experience
Following a successful international career in the 
agrochemical and life sciences industries, Chris 
has become a highly experienced non-executive 
director and business adviser. Chris is the former 
Chief Executive Officer of Arysta LifeScience, a 
Japan-based agrochemical business which grew 
rapidly under his leadership. After stepping down 
as CEO in 2010, he became Arysta LifeScience’s 
Non-Executive Chairman until the sale of the 
business in 2015 to Platform Specialty Products.

After gaining his DPhil from the University of 
Oxford in Biological Science, Chris worked as a 
research scientist for four years. He began his 
executive career in 1983 in the Plant Protection 
division at Imperial Chemical Industries plc, which 
later became Syngenta. For 20 years, he has lived 
in various countries including Colombia and 
Japan and led international marketing and 
commercial functions.

Other roles 
Chris currently holds a number of executive and 
non-executive roles at quoted and private 
businesses. He is the CEO of Plant Health Care 
plc (AIM: PHC) and a Non-Executive Director 
of Origin Enterprises plc (AIM: OGN).

Committees 

N

R

Chief Executive Officer 
(previously Chief Operating Officer 
and Chief Financial Officer)

Appointed
Brian was appointed Chief Executive Officer in 
September 2020. He originally joined the Board 
as Chief Operating Officer and Chief Financial 
Officer in August 2018. He has had a significant 
impact on the Group’s performance in his time 
with Nanoco, particularly in sharpening the 
commercial focus, providing people leadership 
in the UK and improving cost control. Brian also 
previously served as the Company Secretary and 
this role is transitioning to the UK Finance Director.

Skills and experience
Prior to joining Nanoco, Brian held a number of 
senior executive positions with both publicly listed 
and private multinational companies. His roles 
have typically encompassed the full range of 
commercial, operational and financial activities 
with an emphasis on leading change and 
transformation programmes. Brian’s previous 
roles include Interim CEO and subsequently CFO 
of NCC (LSE: NCC) from 2017 to 2018 (cyber security 
professional services) and CFO of Renold plc (LSE: 
RNO) from 2010 to 2016 (engineering manufacturing), 
Scapa plc (AIM: SCPA) from 2007 to 2010 (speciality 
chemicals) and British Nuclear Group (hi-tech 
chemicals and large-scale decommissioning 
projects) from 2003 to 2007. Brian qualified 
as a Chartered Accountant with PwC in 1994. 
He holds a Law degree (LLB Hons) from  
Edinburgh University.

Other roles 
None.

Dr Nigel Pickett

Chief Technology Officer

Appointed
Nanoco’s technology team is led by Nigel, who is 
a co-founder of Nanoco and inventor of Nanoco’s 
key quantum dot scale-up technology. In 2000 
he moved to Manchester where he co-founded 
Nanoco Technologies in 2001.

Skills and experience
Nigel has co-authored over 70 academic papers 
and is an inventor on 150 patents and pending 
applications. He has a passion and experience 
in taking research work from the academic 
bench through to full commercialisation. Nigel 
graduated from Newcastle University in 1991 and 
chose to remain at Newcastle to pursue a PhD 
in the field of Main Group Organometallics and 
is a Fellow of the Royal Society of Chemistry. After 
graduation in 1994 he undertook a postdoctoral 
fellowship at St Andrews University, Scotland, in 
the field of precursor design for metalorganic 
vapour phase epitaxy (“MOVPE”) growth and 
synthesis of nanoparticles using chemical vapour 
deposition (“CVD”) techniques. In 1996 he won 
a Japan Society for the Promotion of Science 
(“JSPS”) fellowship and spent the following year 
working at Tokyo University of Agriculture and 
Technology, Japan. In 1998 he became a 
Research Fellow at Georgia Institute of 
Technology, US, working on the design and 
evaluation of precursors used in MOVPE.

Other roles 
None.

036

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceKey

A

N

R

Audit Committee

Nominations Committee

Remuneration Committee

Chair

Dr Alison Fielding

Chris Batterham 

Non-Executive Senior Independent Director

Non-Executive Director

Appointed
Alison was appointed to the Board in April 2017.

Skills and experience
Alison holds an MBA from Manchester Business 
School, a PhD in Organic Chemistry and a 
first-class degree in Chemistry from the University 
of Glasgow and an MSc in Mindfulness from the 
University of Aberdeen. 

Appointed
Chris Batterham was appointed to the Board 
in April 2019.

Skills and experience
Chris holds a Natural Sciences degree from 
Cambridge University. He then qualified as a 
Chartered Accountant with Arthur Andersen LLP 
in 1979 where he spent his early career.

Alison started her career at Zeneca PLC (now 
Astra Zeneca) followed by five years at McKinsey 
& Company and later co-founded Techtran 
Group Limited, which was acquired by IP Group  
in 2005, where she held the role of Director and 
COO until 2013. Whilst at IP Group, she also sat on 
the board of and advised several early stage and 
quoted IP Group-backed technology companies. 

Chris has considerable financial and operational 
experience and became the Finance Director of 
Unipalm Group plc, from 1996 to 2001. He then 
went on to become CFO of Searchspace Group 
Limited from 2001 until 2005. Chris then went on 
to hold a number of non-executive roles across 
a range of companies with a technology focus 
in many cases.

Other roles 
Alison is currently a Non-Executive Director 
of Getech Group plc, a Non-Executive Director 
of Maven Income and Growth VCT PLC, and 
a Non-Executive Director of Zotefoams plc.

Other roles 
Chris is currently Deputy Chairman of Blue Prism 
Group plc and a Non-Executive Director of 
NCC Group plc. 

Committees 

A N R

Committees 

A N R

Other Directors holding office during the year

Dr Michael Edelman served as CEO and a member of the Board throughout 
the year. He stepped down from his role and the Board on 1 September 2020 
and remains an employee of the Group in an advisory role.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 037

Corporate governance statement

The importance of good governance 
is emphasised in times of uncertainty 
and business change and the 
challenges that brings

DR CHRISTOPHER RICHARDS
Chairman

I am pleased to present the Corporate 

governance report for the year ended 
31 July 2020. This section of the Annual 
Report describes our corporate 
governance structures and processes 
and their application throughout the 
year ended 31 July 2020.

The Board’s views on 
corporate governance

The UK Corporate Governance Code 
embodies core principles of accountability, 
transparency, probity and a focus on 
long-term success. The Board firmly 
believes that a company governed in 
accordance with these principles will be 
a successful and well-managed business 
and that this is all the more important 
in a time of significant uncertainty 
and challenge.

The Board and its Committees play 
a central role in the Group’s governance 
by providing an external and independent 
perspective on matters material to 
Nanoco’s stakeholders, and by seeking 
to ensure that effective internal controls 
and risk management processes are 
in place.

The Board also promotes a culture of 
good governance throughout the Group 
by creating an environment of openness, 
transparency and accountability.

The members of the Board bring a wide 
range of skills and experience to the 
Group as set out on pages 36 and 37. 
This diverse skill set allows the Board to 
appropriately challenge and lead the 
Group’s strategy.

Board focus during the year

Agreeing strategic priorities 
with the Executive Directors

The Board has devoted considerable 
time to strategic discussion in the current 
year. Following the completion of the 
contract with the US Customer in 
December 2019, a review of the competitive 
environment has led to the decision to 
refocus the Company’s “dot only” strategy. 
This seeks to leverage our core skills and 
IP in the creation of novel nanomaterials 
for use in a wide range of applications.

In addition, the decision to initiate 
litigation against Samsung involved 
significant and lengthy discussions 
with executive management and 
a number of advisers. The creation 
of a Litigation Sub-Committee of 
the Board is also a recognition of 
the critical support which the Board 
is providing to the Executive on 
this matter.

Initiating and monitoring the strategic 
review, including the Formal Sales 
Process ("FSP")

This was a key series of actions and 
involved significant commitment from 
all members of the Board. The Board 
received weekly updates from the 
Executive team and our advisers over a 
prolonged period of time. The focus was 
to ensure that all efforts were aligned 
and that all approaches to the Group 
were responded to appropriately.

Strategic 
priorities

Learn and  
improve

Strong 
corporate 
governance

Allocate 
resources

Monitor 
performance

038

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceBoard

22

Attendance

Number of meetings

Executive Directors

Brian Tenner 

Dr Nigel Pickett

Dr Michael Edelman (former CEO)

Non-Executive Directors

Dr Christopher Richards

Dr Alison Fielding

Chris Batterham

Audit  
Committee

Nominations 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

4

3

5

—

—

The Non-Executive Directors met six times during the year without any Executive Directors present.

 Non-Executives

3

2

Executives

Board 
composition

60+
80+

Tenure
(years)

16-20

0-5

4

1

Board focus during the year 
continued

Overall management of risk and change 
within the Group

Initiating and monitoring the lawsuit 
against Samsung and the associated 
third party funding

The Board felt compelled to act to 
defend the Group’s IP portfolio against 
what we believe is Samsung’s wilful 
infringement of our IP in a number 
of areas. This has been especially 
disappointing given the previous 
collaboration between the two 
companies. The Board received regular 
updates from the Executive team and 
our advisers on the basis of the case 
itself and the commercial negotiations 
for third party funding.

Funding and restructuring Group

Following the termination of the FSP 
the Board’s focus switched to the 
restructuring of the Group to protect 
the long-term value inherent in its core 
IP assets, the lawsuit against Samsung, 
and as much of the organic business 
that could be secured with available 
medium-term funding. The restructuring 
included a review of the Board’s own 
structure and processes to ensure 
that governance and cost remain 
appropriate for the Group’s current 
operations. This led to the successful 
and over-subscribed equity fundraise in 
July 2020 and the subsequent changes 
to the Board itself as set out in the 
Chairman’s statement.

The rapidly evolving challenges 
brought about by the end of the 
contract with the US Customer, followed 
soon after by the risks and issues created 
by the Covid-19 pandemic, against a 
background of the strategic review and 
Formal Sales Process, have required 
active real time engagement between all 
members of the Board. This has entailed 
a significant level of activity outside the 
formal Board meetings.

These focus areas were in addition to 
the normal ongoing responsibilities for 
approving the annual operating and 
capital expenditure budgets and any 
material changes to them. Finally, the 
Board continues to play an active role 
in approval of the half-yearly report, 
trading updates, the preliminary results 
announcement and the Annual Report 
and Accounts.

A typical Board agenda

Each full Board meeting is structured 
around a standard agenda of standing 
items that then includes a number of 
additional specific focus items for that 
month’s meeting. These focus items are 
either recurring items (such as risk 
management) or are in response to 
emerging issues in our markets, 
regulation, or the business itself. An 
example of an agenda taken from the 
February 2020 meeting is shown below:

  minutes and matters arising from 
previous meetings (standing item);

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 039

40
+
M
20
+
M
Corporate governance statement continued

A typical Board agenda continued

My role as Chairman

  CEO report on business performance 

(standing item);

  CEO report on Samsung litigation and 

third party funding (focus item);

  CFO report on financial performance 
and rolling forecasts (standing item);

  CTO report on technical and IP 

matters (standing item);

  COO report on progress and customer 

deliverables (recurring item);

  update on Formal Sales Process 
including reports from advisers 
(investment bank Evercore and Group 
Counsel, Reed Smith);

  Company Secretary report on 

governance issues and any material 
litigation (standing item);

  investor relations update (standing item);

  reports from Committee Chairs (Audit, 
Nominations, Remuneration and EHS) 
(recurring item); and

  any other business (standing item).

Certain key senior management members 
are invited to give presentations at Board 
and Committee meetings where appropriate.

Other areas, including the review of the 
Group risk register, the strategic plan, the 
annual budget, contentious matters, 
succession planning, etc. are reviewed by 
the Board during each year at intervals 
commensurate with their importance.

Ad hoc meetings and 
conference calls

It should be noted that the Board held 
a significant number of additional 
meetings and conference calls (22 in 
total) to ensure active co-ordination and 
oversight during the strategic review and 
the Formal Sales Process in particular. 
These typically focused on updates on 
the FSP, interaction with potentially 
interested parties and the preparations 
for the litigation against Samsung.

The structure of the Board, its 
Committees and their respective 
responsibilities are summarised on pages 
41 and 42. My key focus is to ensure that 
Nanoco has an effective Board which is 
collectively responsible for the long-term 
success of the Group. One of my most 
important jobs is to ensure that the 
Board and its Committees have the 
right balance of skills, experience and 
knowledge suitable for Nanoco’s evolving 
strategy and growth aspirations as 
we progress through a new phase of 
our development.

Board and Committee evaluation

Regular and appropriate Board and 
Committee evaluation is vital to 
improving Board effectiveness. This year, 
given the extremely uncertain operating 
environment, it was felt that an external 
performance review would not be as 
value adding as it would be in future with 
a more settled Board. Therefore, I once 
again conducted an internal Board 
evaluation process, which was discussed 
by the Board. Overall, it was concluded that 
the Board and Executive team performed 
well during the year. The quality of 
information, focus and discussion had 
improved and Directors felt fully able to 
voice their differing opinions. In addition, 
the review identified areas of potential 
improvement to further enhance the 
Board’s performance.

Once again it was felt that the balance 
of time allocated to strategy, operations 
and functional areas and governance 
was broadly correct. The Board displayed 
great flexibility and nimbleness in responding 
to rapidly emerging issues. Throughout 
the year, the Board has maintained good 
corporate governance and challenged 
management to continue to improve the 
processes and systems that underpin the 
Group’s normal operating activities.

Each of the Audit Committee, 
Remuneration Committee and 
Nominations Committee carried out 
an internal self-evaluation of their

effectiveness during the year. The 
conclusion from the Committee reviews 
is that, overall, the Committees are 
working well.

Shareholder engagement activities

Engagement with shareholders remains 
an important activity for the Board. 
Our ability to engage with shareholders 
was limited this year during the FSP due 
to the additional regulatory restrictions. 
The Group did maintain its more 
formal calendar of engagement with 
shareholders and potential investors.

Longer-term viability statement

The Group utilised the forecast for the 
next two years to assess its long-term 
viability. The two-year period was 
chosen due to the inherent difficulty and 
uncertainties in preparing forecasts for 
the Group at its current stage of 
development. Further details are 
provided on pages 28 and 29.

Statement of compliance with 
the Code

I am pleased to confirm that the Board 
considers that it has been in compliance 
with the Code throughout the year 
ended 31 July 2020 in all material areas.

Whilst in compliance with the Code, we 
believe that the ratio of Non-Executive 
Directors to Executive Directors was not 
ideal in that the number of Non-Executive 
Directors matched the number of Executive 
Directors. As at 31 July 2020, as permitted 
by the Code due to the size of the Group, 
the Board comprised the Non-Executive 
Chairman, two independent Non-Executive 
Directors and three Executive Directors. 
With the changes in the Board following 
the year end, reducing the number of 
Executives by one, the Board considers 
that the size and composition of the 
Board is now fully appropriate for the 
Group’s current stage of development 
and it has sufficient depth and breadth 
of experience amongst its current 
Board members.

Dr Christopher Richards
Chairman
13 October 2020

040

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceGovernance framework

The different parts of the Company’s 
governance framework are shown below, 
with a description of how they operate 
and the linkages between them.

Board

The Board provides leadership 
and is responsible for the overall 
management of Nanoco, its strategy, 
long-term objectives and risk 
management.

It ensures the right Company structure 
is in place to deliver long-term value 
to shareholders and other 
stakeholders.

Board Committees

Support the Board in its work with specific areas of review and oversight objectives and risk 
management. They ensure the right Company structure is in place to deliver long-term value to 
shareholders and other stakeholders.

Audit  
Committee

Primary function is to assist the 
Board in fulfilling its financial and risk 
responsibilities. It also reviews 
financial reporting and the internal 
controls in place and the 
external audit process.

Nominations  
Committee

Responsible for considering the 
Board’s structure, size, composition 
and succession planning.

Remuneration  
Committee

Responsible for determining 
the overall remuneration of the 
Executive Directors and the 
remuneration of senior managers 
within the broader institutional 
context of remuneration 
practice.

Chief Executive

Has responsibility for managing 
the business and overseeing the 
implementation of the strategy 
agreed by the Board.

Leadership Team

The Leadership team currently represents the Group’s most senior business and operational executives. 
It is responsible for assisting the Chief Executive in the performance of its duties including:

  developing the annual operating plan;

  reviewing the Company’s policies and procedures;

  monitoring the performance of the different 
divisions of the Company against the plan;

  prioritisation and allocation of resources; and

  overseeing the day-to-day running 

  carrying out a formal risk review process;

of the Company.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 041

Corporate governance statement continued

Board composition and division of responsibilities

Role profiles are in place for the Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and others, which clearly set out the duties of each role.

Role

Responsibilities

Chairman of the Board

(Dr Christopher Richards)

Chief Executive Officer

(Brian Tenner)

Chief Financial Officer

(In transition)

Chief Technical Officer 

(Dr Nigel Pickett)

Senior Independent Director

(Dr Alison Fielding)

Other Non-Executive Directors

(Chris Batterham)

Company Secretary

(Liam Gray)

Is responsible for the running of the Board and promoting a culture of openness and debate. The 
Chairman, in conjunction with the CEO and other Board members, plans the agendas, which are issued 
with the supporting Board papers in advance of the Board meetings. These supporting papers provide 
appropriate information to enable the Board to discharge its duties which include monitoring, assessing 
and challenging the executive management of the Group.

Together with the Senior Management team, is responsible for the day-to-day running of the Group and 
regularly provides performance reports to the Board. The role of CEO is separate from that of the Chairman 
to ensure that no one individual has unfettered powers of decision making. The CEO works directly 
through the Leadership team (CTO, Production Manager, UK Finance Director and HR Business Partner).

Works closely with the CEO and CTO to support them in the delivery of their roles. Key objectives are to 
ensure the smooth running of many of the back office functions. Includes responsibility for all financial 
matters including costings and plant efficiencies as well as commercial margins. Following the recent 
Board changes, the Group Financial Controller, Liam Gray, has taken the role of UK Finance Director 
to support the Board and a managed transition of the CEO’s former CFO responsibilities is underway.

Responsible for all research and development activities of the Group. Includes stewardship of the Group’s 
IP portfolio, new additions and maintenance. Takes leadership position on critical new research areas.

Provides a sounding board for the Chairman and serves as an intermediary for other Directors, employees 
and shareholders when necessary. The main responsibility is to be available to the shareholders should 
they have concerns that they have been unable to resolve through normal channels or when such 
channels would be inappropriate.

Maintains an ongoing dialogue with the Executive Directors which includes constructive challenge 
of performance and the Group’s strategy.

Ensures good information flows within the Board and its Committees and between senior management 
and Non-Executive Directors. The Company Secretary is responsible for facilitating the induction of new 
Directors and assisting with their professional development as required. All Directors have access to the 
advice and services of the Company Secretary to enable them to discharge their duties as Directors. 
The Company Secretary is responsible for ensuring that Board procedures are complied with and for 
advising the Board through the Chairman on governance matters. The appointment and removal 
of the Company Secretary is a matter for the Board as a whole.

Experience of the Board

The members of the Board bring a wide range of skills and experience to the Group. This diverse skill set allows the Board to 
appropriately challenge and lead the Group’s strategy.

The chart below summarises its key areas of significant experience.

Strategy 
development

Chemical

Human resources

Corporate 
governance

Financial 
management

M&A

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Name

Dr Christopher Richards

Dr Nigel Pickett

Brian Tenner

Dr Alison Fielding

Chris Batterham

Dr Christopher Richards
Chairman
13 October 2020

042

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceThis section of the Corporate governance 
report contains the Group’s other reporting 
disclosures on corporate governance 
required by the Companies Act 2006, 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 
(the “Code”) and the UKLA’s Disclosure 
and Transparency Rule 7 including the 
required statement of compliance. 
A copy of the Code is publicly available 
at http://www.frc.org.uk.

Disclosure and Transparency Rule 7

This statement complies with sub-sections 
2.1, 2.2(i), 2.3(i), 2.5, 2.7 and 2.10 of Rule 7 of 
the UK Listing Authority Disclosure Rules. 
The information required to be disclosed 
by sub-section 2.6 of Rule 7 is shown in 
the Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 
on page 79 and is incorporated in this 
section by reference.

The Board

The Group is controlled through its Board of 
Directors. The Board’s main responsibilities 
and those of its various sub-committees 
are set out on pages 41 and 42 and are 
summarised opposite.

To enable it to discharge its key 
responsibilities as set out above, the 
Board receives appropriate and timely 
information prior to each meeting. 
A formal agenda is set by each Chair 
and Committee papers are distributed 
several days before meetings take place. 
Any Director may challenge Group 
proposals, and decisions are taken 
democratically after discussion. Any 
Director who feels that any concern 
remains unresolved after discussion may 
ask for that concern to be noted in the 
minutes of the meeting. Specific actions 
arising from meetings are agreed by the 
Board and then appropriately followed up.

The terms of reference of the 
Committees are publicly available 
at www.nanocotechnologies.com. 
The same pages of the Annual Report 
show the key officers and the division 
of responsibilities and duties between 
each role holder.

The Directors

There is a formal, rigorous and transparent 
procedure for the appointment of new 
Directors to the Board, which is led by 
the Nominations Committee.

All Directors are then subject to election 
by the shareholders at the next general 
meeting following appointment to 
the Board. In accordance with best 
practice, they are then subject to annual 
re-election thereafter. The contracts 
of the Non-Executive Directors are 
available for inspection by shareholders 
at the AGM.

The Chairman has sufficient time to 
devote to his duties as Chairman and 
this has been demonstrated by his active 
participation in the Group’s activities.

The Non-Executive Directors constructively 
challenge and help develop proposals on 
strategy and bring strong, independent 
judgement, knowledge and experience 
to the Board’s deliberations.

The Directors are given access to 
independent professional advice at 
the Group’s expense when the Directors 
deem it is necessary in order for them 
to carry out their responsibilities.

The Group maintains, for its Directors 
and officers, liability insurance for any 
claims against them in that capacity.

Donations

During the year the Group made 
no political donations.

Independence and conflicts 
of interest

The Group has effective procedures 
in place to deal with potential conflicts 
of interest. The Board is aware of the 
other commitments of its Directors and 
changes to these commitments are 
reported to the Board. The Companies 
Act 2006 requires Directors to avoid 
situations where they have, or could 
have, a direct or indirect interest that 
conflicts or potentially conflicts with 
the interests of the Group.

Directors are required to declare in 
advance of a Board meeting whether 
any of the business to be discussed 
in that meeting gives rise to a conflict 
or potential conflict. That Director will 
then be excluded from the relevant 
discussions unless agreed otherwise by 
the Directors of the Group in the limited 
circumstances specified in the Articles 
of Association. They will not be counted 
in the quorum or permitted to vote on 
any issue in which they have an interest.

The Board considers its independent 
Non-Executive Directors to be 
independent in character and 
judgement. No Non-Executive Director 
has been an employee of the Group; has 
had a material business relationship with 
the Group; receives remuneration other 
than a Director’s fee; has close family 
ties with any of the Group’s advisers, 
Directors or senior employees; or holds 
cross-directorships.

Professional development

On appointment, each Director takes 
part in an induction programme in which 
they receive comprehensive information 
about the Group; the role of the Board 
and the matters reserved for its decision; 
the terms of reference and membership 
of the Board and Committees and the 
powers delegated to those Committees; 
the Group’s corporate governance 
practices and procedures, including the 
powers reserved to the Group’s most 
senior Executives; and the Group’s latest 
financial information. Throughout their 
period in office the Directors are updated 
on the Group’s business, the competitive 
environment in which it operates, corporate 
social responsibility matters and other 
changes affecting the Group and the 
industry it operates in as a whole.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 043

Corporate governance statement continued

Professional development 
continued

The Group acknowledges the 
importance of developing the skills of 
the Directors to run an effective Board. 
To assist in this, Directors are given the 
opportunity to attend relevant courses 
and seminars to acquire additional 
skills and experience to enhance their 
contribution to the ongoing progress of 
the Group. All of the Directors are given 
briefings on trends and developments 
in corporate governance.

Performance evaluation

The Board has established a formal 
process for the annual evaluation of 
the performance of the Directors. This 
evaluation is based on a performance 
evaluation questionnaire completed 
by each Director. The Chairman’s 
performance is reviewed annually by 
the Non-Executive Directors and led 
by the Senior Non-Executive Director, 
Dr Alison Fielding. The evaluation of the 
Chief Executive Officer is performed by 
the Chairman and the evaluation of the 
other Executive Directors is performed 
by the Chief Executive Officer.

Director dealings in the Group’s 
shares

The Group has adopted a model code 
for Directors’ dealings in securities of 
the Group which is appropriate for a 
company quoted on the premium list 
of the London Stock Exchange. The 
Directors comply with the rules relating 
to Directors’ dealings and also take all 
reasonable steps to ensure compliance 
by the Group’s “applicable employees” 
as defined in the rules.

The Directors’ interests in the ordinary 
share capital and in options over such 
shares of the Company are shown in the 
Directors’ remuneration report on pages 
59 to 75.

Investor communications

Nanoco recognises the importance 
of good and timely communication. Its 
primary communication channel is the 
internet. All press releases are published 
on the Company’s website shortly after 
they are issued via the regulatory news 
service in the United Kingdom. In addition, 
a broad range of other relevant information 
is available on the Group’s website.

The Group also endeavours to ensure 
that all published information is capable 
of being readily understood on a 
stand-alone basis without the need 
for a one-to-one meeting. This is an 
extension of the “fair, balanced, and 
understandable” requirement inherent 
in the Annual Report and Accounts.

Investor engagement

Meetings with analysts and institutional 
shareholders are held following the 
interim and preliminary results and on an 
ad hoc basis. These are usually attended 
by the Chief Executive Officer and Chief 
Financial Officer.

Engagement during the year

Number

One-to-one meetings

Conference calls

Group meetings

Investor conferences

7

14

4

—

The Group takes care to ensure that 
meetings with shareholders or potential 
investors are structured around information 
that is already available to all shareholders 
on an equal footing.

Feedback from these meetings and 
regular market updates are prepared by 
the Group’s broker and are shared with 
the Board.

The Chairman and other Non-Executive 
Directors are available to shareholders to 
discuss strategy and governance issues 
at a shareholder’s request.

044

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceShareholder analysis

Shareholders at 31 July 2020 are analysed as follows:

Territory

UK

Europe (ex UK)

North America

Asia

Rest of World

Total

Type of holder

Retail investors

Hedge funds

Pension funds

Directors

Employees

Unidentified

Total

Investment style

Retail

Hybrid

Directors

Trading

Value and growth

GARP

Unidentified

Total

Shares

271,911,230

14,246,808

17,941,138

95,994

1,503,932

305,699,102

Shares

202,626,721

48,807,105

26,737,242

14,189,829

12,851,279

486,926

305,699,102

Shares

190,216,182

69,840,776

14,189,829

12,941,479

11,067,628

315,000

7,128,208

305,699,102

%

88.95%

4.66%

5.87%

0.03%

0.49%

100%

%

66.28%

15.97%

8.75%

4.64%

4.20%

0.16%

100%

%

62.22%

22.85%

4.64%

4.23%

3.62%

0.10%

2.34%

100%

34

11

89

UK shares
(%)

Domestic 
institutions’ 
shares
(%)

89+
66+
62+

Private 
client 
brokers’ 
shares
(%)

66

62

38

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 045

38
+
M
34
+
M
11
+
M
Corporate governance statement continued

Annual General Meeting (“AGM”)

At the AGM, separate resolutions will be 
proposed for each substantially different 
issue. The outcome of the voting on 
AGM resolutions is disclosed by means 
of an announcement on the London 
Stock Exchange.

All shareholders are encouraged to 
attend the Annual General Meeting and 
talk to the Directors there. All Directors, 
including the Chairs of the Audit, 
Remuneration and Nominations 
Committees, are available at the 
meeting to answer questions.

Shareholders not attending the AGM 
can contact the Group via email at  
info@nanocotechnologies.com.

The table below shows the different 
resolutions proposed at the 2019 AGM, 
the proportions of possible votes 
that were cast and the proportions in 
favour of and against each resolution 
(resolutions 1 to 13 were passed as 
ordinary resolutions and resolutions 14 
to 17 were passed as special resolutions).

The Board takes steps to ensure that 
the views of major shareholders are 
considered through regular contact. 

As appropriate, the Board takes due 
note of their views insofar as these are 
relevant to the Group’s overall approach 
to corporate governance. This is achieved, 
as noted previously, through feedback 
from meetings with significant shareholders 
and feedback from the Group’s brokers. 
Significant shareholders were consulted 
regarding the changes to the remuneration 
policy which were proposed at the 2018 
AGM and that policy (as amended) 
became effective for three years 
(until 31 July 2021).

Votes for

Votes against

Votes

% of total
votes cast

% of total
voting rights

Votes

% of total
votes cast

% of total
voting rights

Votes withheld

% of total
voting rights

Votes

No.

resolution

1

To receive the Annual Report 
and Accounts

80,540,713

100.0%

2

To re-appoint the auditors

80,178,456

100.0%

3 Authority to agree the auditors’ fee 80,180,028

100.0%

4 To elect Chris Batterham

80,165,614

99.9%

28.1%

28.0%

28.0%

28.0%

23,969

31,127

30,054

43,969

5

6

7

8

9

To re-elect Dr Christopher Richards

76,698,672

95.6%

26.8%

3,510,911

To re-elect Dr Michael Edelman

76,782,439

To re-elect Dr Nigel Pickett

To re-elect Brian Tenner

76,793,158

76,800,258

To re-elect Dr Alison Fielding 

80,165,614

95.7%

95.7%

95.7%

99.9%

26.8%

3,427,144

26.8%

3,416,425

26.8%

3,409,325

28.0%

43,969

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.1%

4.4%

4.3%

4.3%

4.3%

0.1%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

1.2%

1.2%

1.2%

1.2%

0.0%

4,000

4,499

4,000

4,499

4,499

4,499

4,499

4,499

4,499

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

10 Approval of Directors’ 
remuneration report

11 Approval of amendment to 

78,238,132

99.8%

27.3%

164,580

0.2%

0.1%

1,811,370

0.6%

Directors’ remuneration policy

80,041,102

99.8%

28.0%

155,767

12 Approval for political donations

76,382,597

95.2%

26.7%

3,825,109

13 Authority to issue and allot shares

80,140,091

99.9%

28.0%

63,906

141 Disapplication of pre-emption rights 76,473,160

95.5%

26.7%

3,609,462

151 Disapplication of pre-emption 

rights for specific 
investment purposes

78,284,859

97.8%

27.4%

1,797,073

161 Authority to purchase own shares

80,166,739

100.0%

28.0%

31,069

0.2%

4.8%

0.1%

4.5%

2.2%

0.0%

0.1%

1.3%

0.0%

1.3%

0.6%

0.0%

17,213

6,376

10,085

131,460

132,150

16,274

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

0.0%

171 Authority to reduce notice 

of general meetings (excluding 
the AGM)

1  Proposed as special resolutions.

80,040,010

99.9%

28.0%

69,382

0.1%

0.0%

104,690

0.0%

046

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceNominations Committee report

Maintaining the right mix of skills and 
experience is our key responsibility 
and is critical to creating long-term 
shareholder value in a rapidly evolving 
operating environment

DR CHRISTOPHER RICHARDS
Nominations Committee Chair

The Board deeply believes that 

strong, responsible and balanced 
leadership with an appropriate 
mix of skills for the challenges the 

Group faces are critical to creating 
long-term shareholder value and 
business success. The Committee met 
five times during the year.

Roles and responsibilities

The Committee is primarily responsible 
for assisting the Board in ensuring the 
appropriate composition of the Board 
and any Committees of the Board. It is 
also responsible for periodically reviewing 
the Board’s structure and identifying 
potential candidates to be appointed as 
Directors or Committee members as the 
need may arise within the parameters 
illustrated below:

Board mix 
of skills and 
experience

Recruitment 
to Board and 
Committees

Supporting 
value creation

Diversity of 
Board and 
employees

Good 
governance

Members

  Dr Christopher Richards (Chair)

  Dr Alison Fielding

  Christopher Batterham

50%

15%

Allocation 
of time1

15+

Performance evaluation

35%

Succession planning

Board and Committee composition

1  Estimated.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 047

35
+
50
+
M
Committee activities during 
the year

During the year the Nominations 
Committee discussed a range of topics 
including Board structure, its 
independence and skill set. In addition, 
the Committee discussed options to 
enhance employee engagement with 
the Board, in line with recent trends in 
corporate social responsibility. The key 
activities are set out in more detail below.

Board structure

Given the Group’s new form, and 
considering both the scale and 
commercial focus of the business, as 
well as the available financial resources 
following the equity fundraise in July 2020, 
the Committee discussed the appropriate 
shape, size and skill set of the Board for 
its future operations. Our discussions 
aimed to ensure that the future cost and 
governance benefits of a larger Board 
are balanced against the need to extend 
the Group’s cash runway and to ensure 
that the Group remains a going concern.

The Committee concluded that now is 
the appropriate time to reduce the size 
and financial cost of the Board. The 
Committee also felt strongly that the 
Board should show leadership in cutting 
costs before considering significant 
changes to the employee base.

The new composition where the majority 
of the Board are Non-Executive Directors 
will also further the Group’s maintenance 
of high standards of corporate governance.

Board membership

As a protective pre-emptive measure 
prior to the new commercial deals, third 
party funding for the lawsuit and the 
equity raise in July 2020, notice had been 
served on Dr Michael Edelman (CEO) 
and Dr Nigel Pickett (CTO) in April 2020. 
This action was taken to mitigate 
any incremental cost arising from the 
twelve-month notice periods in the event 
that the Group was unable to source 
adequate additional funding or new 
commercial revenues.

Nominations Committee report continued

Roles and responsibilities 
continued

The Nominations Committee is 
responsible for evaluating the balance 
of skills, knowledge and experience and 
the size, structure and composition of 
the Board and Committees of the Board, 
and retirements and appointments of 
additional and replacement Directors 
and Committee members, and makes 
appropriate recommendations to the 
Board on such matters.

Governance

The responsibilities of the Committee 
include an additional focus on 
governance. This change was made 
in order to enhance the Group’s 
improvement plans for governance 
issues. The Committee’s terms of 
reference now include:

Committee membership

In accordance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code the Nominations 
Committee consists of Non-Executive 
Directors. It is chaired by me, Dr Christopher 
Richards, since my appointment as a 
Non-Executive Director in November 
2015. I have continued in this role after 
having been made Chairman of the 
Board in May 2016. The Board considers it 
appropriate for me to chair the Nominations 
Committee in order to achieve a balance 
with the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees, which are each chaired 
by other Non-Executive Directors.

The Committee’s other members are 
Dr Alison Fielding and Christopher 
Batterham. All members of the 
Committee are considered to have 
experience and competence relevant 
to the duties and responsibilities of 
the Committee.

  reviewing and considering the 

Company’s procedures and controls 
for ensuring compliance with:

Summary biographies of all members 
of the Committee are detailed on pages 
36 and 37.

  the UK Corporate Governance Code;

  the FCA Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rules, the Market 
Abuse Regulation, and any other 
applicable rules and regulations 
that apply to the Group; and

  the timely and accurate disclosure 
of all information that is required to 
be disclosed in order to satisfy the 
Company’s legal and regulatory 
obligations under the Corporate 
Governance Requirements;

Meeting frequency and attendance

The terms of reference of the Committee 
require at least two meetings per year. 
When specific issues or changes need to 
be addressed, such as the appointment 
of a new Board member, the Committee 
meets on additional occasions. The 
Committee met five times during the 
financial year and was attended as 
shown in the table below:

  recommending any proposed 

Committee member

changes in the management of 
corporate governance to the Board;

  reporting on such compliance 

to the Board;

  reviewing potential conflicts of interest 
involving Directors and determining 
whether such Director or Directors 
may vote on any issue as to which 
there may be a conflict; and

  reviewing all related party transactions 

and determining whether such 
transactions are appropriate for the 
Company to undertake and advise 
the Board accordingly.

Dr Christopher Richards (Chair)

Chris Batterham

Dr Alison Fielding

Meetings/
attended

5/5

5/5

5/5

As well as the members of the Committee, 
the meetings are occasionally attended 
on an invitational basis by the Chief 
Executive Officer and the Chief Financial 
Officer where there are no perceived 
conflicts of interest. On matters of 
remuneration of new appointees the 
Chair works closely with the Chair and 
members of the Remuneration Committee.

Meetings of the Nominations Committee 
are either scheduled around existing 
Board meetings or else on an ad hoc 
basis such as during a recruitment 
process. The Committee Chair provides 
the Board with a full briefing on all 
relevant matters.

048

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceReview of the Nominations 
Committee’s effectiveness

The Committee has reviewed and 
considered the effectiveness of its 
performance during the year. The review 
included the views of members of the 
Committee and of regular attendees at 
the various meetings (including the 
Executive Directors). I am satisfied that 
the degree of rigour and challenge 
applied in performing the Committee’s 
responsibilities is appropriate and 
effective and continues to improve.

Dr Christopher Richards
Nominations Committee Chair
13 October 2020

Committee activities during 
the year continued

Board membership continued

Following the successful equity raise and 
having concluded that a smaller Board 
would be more appropriate for the likely 
short to medium-term operational 
activities within the Group, the 
Committee reviewed the previously 
agreed succession plan for the role of 
CEO. The Committee was pleased to 
recommend to the Board that Brian 
Tenner be promoted to the role of CEO, 
having been recruited with this in mind 
and having made a significant positive 
contribution to all aspects of the Group 
since his appointment.

Michael Edelman stepped down from 
his role as CEO and as a member of 
the Board on 1 September 2020 while 
remaining an employee of the Group. 
The financial arrangements for his 
ceasing to hold office are set out in the 
Remuneration Committee report. Nigel 
Pickett’s notice of termination will be 
reassessed in due course in light of 
emerging opportunities and the level 
of business activity.

Employee engagement

In the prior year, the Committee 
discussed at some length options to 
enhance employee engagement, with 
options ranging from an employee director 
to more opportunities for employees to 
meet with and put their views to the 
Non-Executive Directors. The Committee 
concluded that we would establish an 

employee representative body which 
would formally meet with a designated 
member of the Board at least twice 
a year. Recognising her strong skills 
and experience in this area, the Board 
agreed that Dr Alison Fielding should be 
the designated Non-Executive Director 
responsible for formal engagement with 
the employee body (the Employee Voice 
Committee). That Committee met very 
effectively during the year, both formally 
and informally, with a focus on meetings 
and open question and answer sessions 
during challenging times within the 
business, such as business restructuring.

Diversity

The Group pursues diversity, including 
gender diversity, throughout the 
business. When recruiting at Board level, 
the Nominations Committee requires that 
any executive search firms used by the 
Group have signed up to its industry’s 
voluntary code of conduct (prepared in 
response to the Davies Review of Women 
on Boards). The Group follows a policy of 
appointing talented people on merit at 
every level and does not have a specific 
target for numbers of female Directors. 
The Board will also ensure that its own 
development in this area is consistent 
with its strategic objectives and 
enhances Board effectiveness. Other 
aspects of diversity in the Group are 
commented on in the Report on 
corporate social responsibility on pages 
30 to 35.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 049

Audit Committee report

Maintaining a robust internal control 
and risk management framework 
at a time of heightened business 
uncertainty and funding constraints

CHRIS BATTERHAM
Audit Committee Chair

Members

  Chris Batterham (Chair)

  Dr Alison Fielding

5%

5%

25%

Allocation 
of time1

5+

Performance evaluation

10%

20%

35%

Succession planning

Accounting matters

Risk management

Internal controls

Financial reporting

1  Estimated.

Meeting frequency and 
attendance

The terms of reference of the Committee 
require at least four meetings per year. 
The Committee met four times during the 
financial year. As well as the members of 
the Committee, the meetings are usually 
attended on an invitational basis by the 
Chairman, the Chief Executive Officer 
and the UK Finance Director. The external 
auditors attend each meeting unless the 
business of the meeting does not need 
them to be present. The Committee also 
has meetings with the external auditors 
without the Executive Directors being 
present. Attendance of each member 
is set out below:

Committee member

Chris Batterham (Chair)

Dr Alison Fielding

Meetings/
attended

4/4 

4/4

The Audit Committee plays 

a central role in the review of 
the Group’s financial reporting, 
internal control and risk 

management processes. Its aim is 
to ensure that these processes deliver 
high quality and timely information.

The Audit Committee monitors internal 
and external risk factors on behalf of 
the Board. These are maintained in the 
Group’s risk register. The status and 
assessment of matters in the risk register 
also inform the drafting of the viability 
report. As a Committee it seeks not just 
to respond to external factors but to 
support and challenge management to 
anticipate future risks and opportunities.

Committee membership

The composition of the Committee 
currently comprises me, Chris Batterham 
(Chair), and Dr Alison Fielding. In 
accordance with the provisions of the 
Code, the Committee is made up of 
independent Non-Executive Directors. 
The Board considers that I have recent 
and relevant financial experience to act 
as Chair of the Committee, by virtue of 
being a qualified Chartered Accountant 
with extensive relevant experience as a 
former CFO and finance director of a 
number of private and public companies. 
All members of the Committee are 
considered to have experience and 
competence relevant to the material 
science sector.

Summary biographies of all members of 
the Committee are detailed on pages 
36 and 37.

050

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governance5
+
35
+
10
+
20
+
25
+
M
Audit Committee 
responsibilities
The key areas of focus for the Audit 
Committee are set out below. This 
includes specific duties of the 
Committee in each area, how it 
operates and any changes and 
improvements made over time. The 
subjects referred to are a mix of annual 
recurring areas and also specific issues 
that have arisen or been reviewed 
during the last year.

  ensuring the Group remains up 
to date with developments in 
accounting and reporting 
requirements; and

  advising the Board on whether or 

not the financial statements, when 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced 
and understandable. In simple terms 
this means that shareholders receive 
adequate information to assess the 
Group’s strategy, business model 
and performance.

External audit

The primary objective in this area is 
to ensure that the Group is subject to 
an appropriately robust, risk focused 
external audit from a qualified and 
independent firm of auditors.

Our responsibilities in this area include:

  advising the Board on the 

appointment of the external 
auditors;

  reviewing and monitoring the 
performance of the external 
auditors, which includes the 
planning and effective execution 
of the external audit process itself; 

  setting the audit and non-audit 
fees of the auditors to avoid any 
potential conflicts of interest with 
executive management (non-audit 
fees are set out in note 6 to the 
financial statements); and

  controlling the award of non-audit 
work to the external auditors to 
ensure that there is no actual or 
perceived threat to its 
independence.

Financial reporting

The primary objective here is to ensure 
that internal and external financial 
information is robust, relevant, reliable, 
and a firm basis for decision making by 
management and external stakeholders 
alike. These activities are typically 
carried on throughout the year. They 
lend themselves to a “continuous 
improvement” mindset that means 
we are always looking to do better.

Our responsibilities in this area include: 

  reviewing and monitoring the 

integrity of the Group’s annual 
and interim financial statements;

  ensuring the appropriateness 

of accounting policies;

  reviewing and challenging the 

critical judgements and estimates 
used in financial reporting. This 
includes assessing any potential 
impact of accounting judgements 
and estimates on executive 
remuneration;

  ensuring that the financial 

information being provided internally 
to the Board and to management is 
as robust as that reported externally 
and evolves to meet the changing 
needs of the business;

Internal control and risk 
management

Our internal control and risk 
management processes are a 
fundamental part of the over-arching 
framework used to safeguard the 
assets of the business and to ensure 
that investments represent an 
appropriate balance of risk and return. 
We work to ensure that these are as 
good as they can be for our business.

Our responsibilities in this area include:

  continual monitoring of the 

appropriateness and effectiveness 
of internal controls (including 
whether an internal audit function 
is required);

  review of lessons learned and 

management remediation plans for 
any shortcomings or improvement 
plans to internal control processes;

  review of progress and commitment 
to addressing control improvement 
opportunities identified by the 
external auditors;

  review and challenge of the models 

and assumptions underlying the going 
concern and viability statements;

  oversight of whistleblowing and 
fraud detection and prevention 
mechanisms; and

  ongoing review of the Group’s 
risk management processes 
and systems, including a 
substantive review and challenge 
of management’s assessment 
of key risks.

The Audit Committee also assists the 
Board in ensuring the overall corporate 
governance framework is appropriate 
by giving due consideration to laws 
and regulations, the provisions of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code and 
the requirements of the Listing Rules.

Financial 
reporting

External 
audit

Internal control 
and risk 
management

Audit 
Committee

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 051

Audit Committee report continued

Meeting frequency 
and attendance continued

  continuing appropriateness of the 

Group’s accounting policies;

Meetings of the Audit Committee are 
scheduled to occur in the run up to key 
events in the Group’s reporting calendar. 
Each meeting precedes a Board meeting 
to allow the Committee Chair to fully 
brief the Board on all relevant matters.

The Committee has a pre-determined 
series of subjects and issues to be 
reviewed each year. These are then 
supplemented by additional review of 
emerging issues or changes in the 
financial reporting or governance 
regimes. In this way the Committee 
ensures that key recurring themes are 
regularly reviewed while maintaining 
the flexibility to adapt to changing 
circumstances.

In addition to the scheduled Committee 
meetings, the members of the Committee 
meet and discuss emerging issues for the 
business with the CFO and Group Financial 
Controller to ensure that the work of the 
Committee remains appropriately focused 
on the risks and needs of the business.

Continued improvements in the quality, 
relevance and timeliness of information 
being provided to the Committee and 
the Board as a whole have allowed an 
enhanced level of review, challenge and 
scrutiny by the Committee.

Activities of the Audit Committee

The Committee discharged its 
obligations in response to the financial 
year as follows:

Significant issues considered during the 
year in respect of the financial statements

The Committee assessed the following 
matters in respect of financial reporting 
and in the preparation of the Interim Report 
and the Annual Report and Accounts:

  continuous development in the quality 

and transparency of the Group’s 
external reporting;

  a review of key judgements and 

estimates made by management 
(see table below);

  considering if the financial statements, 

when taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable; and

  considering the impact of the 

implementation of the new revenue 
recognition standard, IFRS 16, the new 
leases standard, which applies in full 
for the first time in this year’s financial 
statements.

In this way, the Directors aim to make sure 
as wide a range of issues as possible are 
considered without over-burdening the 
reader of the financial statements with 
insignificant or immaterial matters.

Significant accounting matters 
and areas of significant 
management judgement

The Committee, together with the 
Board, considered what the significant 
accounting matters and areas of 
management judgement in relation to 
the financial statements were and how 
these would be addressed. 

Each item is considered in further 
detail below.

Our approach to materiality

Adoption of IFRS 16 Leases

The financial statements must present 
a true and fair view of the performance 
and financial position of the Group. They 
must also present a fair, balanced and 
understandable view. These are both 
aimed at ensuring that a user of the 
accounts can gain an accurate picture 
of the underlying performance and 
position of the business. To achieve this 
all material matters need to be 
addressed. Material matters are those 
that are considered by the Directors to 
be likely to influence the decisions of a 
reader of the accounts.

The Directors take a range of quantitative 
and qualitative matters into account in 
assessing whether or not a matter is 
deemed to be material. These include the 
absolute size of a potential adjustment by 
reference to the overall income statement 
or the financial position statement but 
also by reference to an individual 
component. Qualitative judgements 
include whether an issue would reverse or 
materially alter a trend (such as turning a 
profit into a loss, or growth into a decline).

IFRS 16 deals with accounting for leases 
that were previously split between 
operating and finance leases. Note 3 
to the financial statements shows the 
impact of this new accounting standard.

The Committee reviewed the technical 
accounting paper prepared by 
management. The Committee was 
satisfied that the carrying value of the 
assets and liabilities arising from the 
Group’s leases were properly stated 
and disclosed.

Revenue recognition and deferred 
income (recurring item) 

The Committee reviewed the revenue 
recognition policies and management 
judgements made in the preparation of 
the financial statements. Where revenue 
relates to the sale of products or services 
to customers, there is little need for 
judgement or estimates as these types 
of revenue are recognised either on the 
transfer of risks and rewards of ownership 
of goods or on a time and material basis 
for delivery of services.

052

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceSignificant accounting matters 
and areas of significant 
management judgement continued

Revenue recognition and deferred 
income (recurring item) continued

The contract with the US Customer was 
the most material source of revenue in 
the year. This contract and all associated 
performance obligations were delivered 
in full by 31 December and hence no 
estimates or judgements were required 
to conclude that all revenue had been 
earned in full by the end of the contract.

Other new sources of revenue earned in 
the year were derived from the sale of 
goods or the performance of short-term 
professional services work and hence 
little judgement was required in assessing 
these contracts under IFRS 15.

The Committee concluded that the 
judgements and estimates made by 
management in respect of revenue 
recognition and the treatment of 
deferred income and contract liabilities 
were reasonable and appropriately 
disclosed in the financial statements.

Carrying value of intangible assets 
(recurring item)

The Group holds a number of intangible 
assets, primarily relating to IP. At the end of 
the year these had a value of £3.7 million 
(2019: £3.9 million). Given that the Group is 
yet to make a profit, management must 
exercise judgement in assessing whether 
or not this value can be recovered from 
the ongoing operation of the business or 
through disposal. Actual market disposal 
values achieved for equivalent IP 
technology-based businesses are one 
data point used in this assessment. 
Management performs an annual 
assessment of whether or not these 
assets should be impaired.

The Committee challenged and reviewed 
the results of the assessment carried out 
by management. The Committee agreed 
with management that a £0.1 million 
impairment of a small number of 
individual assets was required in the 
current year.

Going concern (recurring item)

The Committee considered the use of 
the going concern basis for preparing 
the financial statements. This is currently 
an annual recurring activity given the 
ongoing losses incurred by the business 
in advance of generating full scale 
production levels of commercial revenues.

The review by management takes 
into account existing available cash 
resources, run rates on operating costs 
and cash burn, as well as probability 
weighted assessments of potential 
income streams. The Group’s base case 
forecasts (which are approved by the 
Board) are then subject to downside 
scenario modelling and sensitivity 
analysis. This includes identifying 
different management action plans 
in response to a downside scenario 
crystallising. The analysis is performed 
for the twin purposes of preparing the 
viability statement and also assessing 
whether or not the going concern basis 
for the preparation of the financial 
statements remains appropriate. The 
going concern analysis is effectively a 
subset of the two-year period used for 
viability analysis.

The assessment by management and 
the Committee includes reference to the 
material potential risks identified in the 
Group’s risk register and any mitigating 
actions and controls as shown on pages 
25 to 27.

The Committee concluded that the 
restructured Group has adequate 
financial resources to adopt the going 
concern basis for the preparation of the 
financial statements. Given the nature of 
the risks that the Group faces while its 
activities are at a pre-commercial stage, 
the Committee continues to recommend 
that the Annual Report and Accounts 
maintains a relatively high level of 
disclosure of these matters in the 
financial statements – as set out in 
the sections on risk, viability and going 
concern on pages 25 to 29.

Financial reporting on a fair, 
balanced and understandable 
(“FBU”) basis

The Committee reviewed the interim 
and annual financial statements. As 
part of that review process, the members 
of the Committee were provided with a 
draft of the full Annual Report enabling 
them to ensure that the numbers 
therein were consistent with those 
in the financial statements or were 
sourced from appropriate data and their 
knowledge gained from the monthly 
management accounts.

The Committee also assessed whether 
the narrative description of the Group’s 
activities and performance was 
consistent with its own understanding 
obtained through Board and Audit 
Committee meetings and other 
interactions it had with management. 

The CFO advised the Committee of the 
findings of independent readers of the 
draft Annual Report and Accounts. These 
reviews are carried out by Nanoco senior 
managers who have not been closely 
involved in drafting the Annual Report. 
Their knowledge of the business 
allows them to form an opinion if the 
document conveys a fair, balanced 
and understandable view of business 
performance in the current year. The 
Committee members themselves also 
perform this function by reference to 
the matters discussed at the regular 
Board meetings.

Drawing on this knowledge of the 
Group’s activities and its own industry 
knowledge and experience, supplemented 
by advice received from external 
advisers during the drafting process, 
the Board determined that the Annual 
Report and Accounts are fair, balanced 
and understandable.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 053

Audit Committee report continued

External audit

External audit plan

The Committee reviewed the proposed 
audit plan ahead of the year end. The 
Committee was satisfied that the areas 
of audit risk highlighted by PwC were 
appropriate and included all material 
matters. The Committee subsequently 
reviewed the actual audit report by PwC 
to ensure that it aligned closely with 
those risks and the planned audit work.

Safeguarding auditors’ independence

The independence of the external 
auditors is essential to the provision 
of an objective opinion on the true 
and fair view presented in the financial 
statements. The Committee reviews the 
policies and status of the independence 
of the external auditors consistent with 
the ethical standards published by the 
Auditing Practices Board.

Auditors’ independence and objectivity 
are also safeguarded by limiting the 
nature and value of non-audit services 
performed by the external auditors (see 
later section). The Group has a policy 
of not recruiting senior employees of 
the external auditors who have worked 
on the audit in the past two years. The 
Group works with the external auditors 
to achieve the rotation of the lead 
engagement partner at least every five 
years. With the change in auditors, the 
current lead engagement partner is 
in their second year of this position.

The external auditors are also required 
periodically to assess whether, in their 
professional opinion, they are independent 
and those views are shared with the 
Audit Committee. The Committee has 
authority to take independent advice as 
it deems appropriate in order to resolve 
issues on auditors’ independence. No 
such advice has to date been required. 

The audit was last tendered in 2018, and 
PwC were appointed. This is their second 
year as external auditors of the annual 
report and financial statements.

For the current year, the Committee has 
concluded that the external auditors 
remain independent and objective for 
the purposes of their role.

Non-audit services provided by the 
external auditors

The Audit Committee will only approve 
the provision of non-audit services 
by the external auditors where they 
do not represent a threat (by their 
nature or scale) to this requirement for 
independence. The aim is to ensure that 
no material risk is taken of the auditors 
both advising on and auditing the same 
information in the financial statements.

The Audit Committee’s approval is 
required for any fees for non-audit work 
paid to the auditors in excess of £10,000 
in any financial year. However, the Group 
recognises that it can receive particular 
benefit from certain non-audit services 
provided by the external auditors due 
to their technical skills and detailed 
understanding of the Group’s business 
and hence some non-audit work is allowed.

The only fees paid for non-audit services 
during the year related to a review 
of the interim results. This additional 
piece of work is not considered at risk 
of jeopardising their independence. 
Separate external firms are engaged 
for taxation advice.

Internal controls and risk 
management

The Board has overall responsibility for 
the Group’s system of internal controls as 
one critical part of the overall corporate 
governance framework. This includes 
reviewing the effectiveness of these 
controls and the processes in place for 
risk management. In accordance with 
the Internal Control Guidance for 
Directors issued by the Financial 
Reporting Council, there is an ongoing 
process for identifying, evaluating and 
managing the significant risks faced by 
the Group. This process was introduced 
during 2015 and is summarised on pages 
25 to 27.

The role of the Executive Directors is to 
implement the Board’s policies on risk 
and control and to provide assurance 
on compliance with these policies. 
The processes and procedures in place 
are designed to manage rather than 
eliminate risk and operate within the 

“ The Board 
determined that the 
Annual Report and 
Accounts are fair, 
balanced and 
understandable.”

Board’s defined risk appetite. They 
therefore can only provide a reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss.

Executive Directors have a close involvement 
with all day-to-day operations. They also 
meet with staff on a regular basis to 
identify and review business risks, the 
controls needed to minimise those risks 
and the effectiveness of controls in 
place. Business risks are monitored and 
discussed on a regular basis at meetings 
of the Leadership and Senior Management 
teams. The principal risks faced by the 
Group and other aspects of how they are 
individually assessed and managed are 
set out below and on pages 25 to 27.

Internal controls

Key features of the internal control 
system are summarised below:

(i) 

 annual budgets and rolling forecasts 
are reviewed and approved by 
the Board;

(ii)   monthly management accounts 
are reviewed and challenged by 
comparison to the budget;

(iii)   written operational, accounting and 
employment policies are in place;

(iv)   the Board actively identifies and 
evaluates the risks inherent in 
the business and ensures that 
appropriate controls and procedures 
are in place to manage these risks;

054

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governancesystem is effective in safeguarding 
shareholders’ interests and the Group’s 
assets. Such a system can only provide 
reasonable and not absolute assurance 
against material misstatement or loss, 
nor can it eliminate the risk of failure. 
The Committee notes any control 
improvement opportunities identified by 
the external auditors and is overseeing a 
programme of continuous improvement 
to our control environment in a rolling 
plan developed by the finance team.

Review of the Audit Committee’s 
effectiveness

The Committee has reviewed and 
considered the effectiveness of its 
performance during the year. The review 
included the views of members of the 
Committee and of regular attendees 
at the various meetings (including the 
Executive Directors). We specifically 
considered the performance of the 
Committee following the transition 
of the Chair’s role to myself at the 
end of the prior year. I am satisfied that 
the degree of rigour and challenge 
applied in performing the Committee’s 
responsibilities is appropriate and 
effective and continues to improve.

Christopher Batterham
Audit Committee Chair
13 October 2020

Internal controls and risk 
management continued

Internal controls continued

(v)   expenditure approval limits and 
approval processes are in place 
to cover all major commitments;

(vi)   quality assurance processes are 

overseen and audited by the internal 
quality assurance department, with 
a particular focus on non-financial 
processes and procedures which 
drive financial performance; and

(vii)  compliance with control procedures 
is monitored by the Audit Committee 
through its reviews of internal and 
external audit findings and its reviews 
of exceptions.

The Committee considers that the 
need for an internal audit function is 
not currently warranted due to the size 
and complexity of the business but will 
reconsider this need not less than annually.

Whistleblowing and confidential 
reporting procedures

The Group operates a confidential 
reporting and whistleblowing procedure. 
The policy aims to support the 
stewardship of the Group’s assets and 
the integrity of the financial statements 
as well as protecting staff welfare. The 
procedure is reviewed annually by the 
Committee to ensure that it remains fit 
for purpose.

The Committee did not receive any 
notifications through the whistleblowing 
process during the year. The Committee 
has recommended that staff are 
regularly reminded of the whistleblowing 
process as part of ongoing engagement 
with staff on compliance issues such as 
anti-bribery training.

Internal accountability

The Board has overall responsibility for 
the Group’s system of risk management 
and internal control. The Audit Committee 
reviews the effectiveness of the system 
at least annually on behalf of the Board 
and, having carried out this review, the 
Board continues to believe that the 

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 055

Remuneration Committee report

Taking the lead in maintaining 
an appropriate cost base for the 
Board, balanced with the need to 
retain and incentivise management 
in line with our strategic goals

DR ALISON FIELDING
Remuneration Committee Chair

Dear shareholder

As the Chairman of Nanoco’s 

Remuneration Committee (the 
“Committee”), I am pleased to 
present our Directors’ remuneration 

report for the year ended 31 July 2020. 
The Committee’s report seeks to deliver 
an appropriate balance between the 
required regulatory disclosures, commercial 
sensitivities and the context for our 
approach and decisions.

This report is presented in three parts:

(1) 

 an overview of the year from me, 
the Committee Chair, including 
prospective matters for the new year 
ending 31 July 2021;

(2)   the Directors’ remuneration policy 

setting out the framework approved 
by shareholders at the AGM in 
December 2018 (with one small 
modification approved by 
shareholders in December 2019); and

(3)   the Annual report on remuneration, 
which sets out the actual results of 
applying the policy to executive 
remuneration over the year ended 
31 July 2020.

Our remuneration policy is designed 
to promote the long-term success of 
the business by ensuring a focus on 
performance related pay that drives 
our transformation from an R&D focus 
to a commercial production focus 
and provides a clear emphasis on 
long-term sustainable performance. 
The Remuneration Committee seeks to 
ensure that the Directors’ remuneration 
arrangements continue to be aligned 
to the strategic direction of the Group 
and to our stakeholder philosophy.

This Directors’ remuneration report for 
the year ended 31 July 2020 complies 
with the requirements of the Listing Rules 
of the UK Listing Authority, Schedule 8 of 
the Large and Medium-sized Companies 
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
Regulations 2008 and the provisions of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 
(July 2018). The Regulations require the 
auditors to report to the Company’s 
members on certain parts of the Directors’ 
remuneration report and to state 
whether, in their opinion, those parts of 
the report have been properly prepared 
in accordance with the accounting 
regulations. Items that are audited 
throughout this report are clearly marked 
as audited in the heading of the section.

Board changes

During the year, and following the end of 
the contract with the US Customer, the 
Group took a number of actions to reduce 
our cost base and to extend our cash 
runway. This included 35% reductions to 
Non-Executive Directors’ fees and 20% 
salary reductions for the Executive Directors, 
both taking effect on 1 April 2020. In 
consultation with the Nominations 
Committee, it was also deemed prudent 
to take pre-emptive action to mitigate a 
potential future financial risk by serving 
notice on the CEO (Dr Michael Edelman) 
and the CTO (Dr Nigel Pickett) at that 
time, given the twelve-months notice 
periods in their employment contracts.

During the year, the Chairman continued to 
defer the second increase in his fees that 
had been agreed in the prior year. This 
was in addition to the 35% reduction 
applied to all Non-Executive Directors.

056

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Members

  Dr Alison Fielding (Chair)

  Chris Batterham

  Dr Christopher Richards

40%

25%

5%

Allocation 
of time1

5+

Performance evaluation

10%

15%

5%

Succession planning

Employee engagement

Diversity

Governance

Reward and targets

1  Estimated.

Following the year end, Michael Edelman 
stepped down from his position as CEO and 
from the Board. The payments associated 
with his ceasing to hold office are disclosed 
in the relevant section of this report. Brian 
Tenner became CEO with effect from 
1 September 2020 any potential change 
to his remuneration will be assessed in 
the coming months. There were no other 
changes to the Board during the year.

Corporate governance25
+
15
+
5
+
10
+
40
+
M
Relating remuneration to current business performance

The Committee has at all times been fully cognisant of the need to show leadership in Executive and Board remuneration at a 
time when a significant number of staff have been furloughed during the Covid-19 pandemic and also when a number of staff 
were facing redundancy. While a number of important and potentially value adding outcomes have been delivered in the current 
year, the Group’s financial resources mean that variable reward has been limited and the focus in the new financial year will be 
on non-cash incentives that are closely aligned to shareholder objectives.

Shareholders voted to approve a small amendment to the Group’s remuneration policy at the AGM in December 2019 which 
allows 100% of any annual bonus to be paid in shares under the Deferred Bonus Plan. This was then applied to the bonus award 
for the financial year ending 31 July 2019 with an award of deferred shares in December 2019. This approach was designed to 
preserve the Group’s cash resources and this is likely to continue for any potential bonus awards in the medium term.

Directors’ remuneration policy

Our Directors’ remuneration policy was last approved by shareholders at the 2018 Annual General Meeting, with more than 96% 
of votes cast being in favour of it. It was subsequently amended at the 2019 AGM as described above.

That policy was applied during the year ended 31 July 2020, as described in the Annual report on remuneration, and will be 
applicable for the three years ending 31 July 2021. The Remuneration Committee believes that the policy approved in 2018 and 
as amended in 2019 provides an appropriate alignment to both the Group’s strategy and shareholders.

Element

Changes, rationale and summary of current position

Base salary

No change to policy. The Executive Directors’ salaries for the new financial year were frozen at the same 
level as last year, with the 20% salary reductions to be reviewed in March 2021.

Benefits

No change to policy. Life insurance is the only benefit currently provided.

Retirement benefits No change to policy. Contributions remain at 5% of salary (a policy limit of 10%). Company pension 
contributions for all staff will be increased from 4% to 5% to fully align with the Executive Directors.

Annual bonus

No change to policy. Maximum remains 100% of salary. Up to 100% of any award can be paid in awards of shares 
or options, deferred for two years, with any balance paid in cash. 80% of the annual bonus is based on financial 
measures and 20% on stretching personal objectives. Bonus only payable if financial measures achieved.

LTIP

No change to policy. Normal maximum remains at 100% of salary (up to 250% in exceptional circumstances).

Shareholding 
guideline

Other changes

No change to policy. All Executive Directors to acquire and retain shares with a value equal to 200% 
of salary (increased in 2018 from the 100% level for others than the CEO in the 2015 policy).

No change to policy. Malus and clawback provisions were extended in the policy approved in 2018 
to permit the application of malus and clawback in the event of a material corporate failure.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 057

  Non-Executive Director fees will 
remain subject to the 35% cut 
implemented on 1 April 2020. This will 
also be reviewed in March 2021. The 
second increase in the Chairman’s 
underlying fees (before the 35% 
reduction) also remains on hold.

  Under the updated Corporate 

Governance Code the Committee is 
required to develop a post-employment 
shareholding policy. Recognising that 
at the 2021 Annual General Meeting 
the Company will seek shareholder 
approval for a revised Directors’ 
remuneration policy, the Committee 
will consider its approach to post-
employment shareholding during 
the course of the year commencing 
1 August 2020, before formalising its 
approach in that Policy. In this context, 
its current approach is to reply upon 
the “leaver” provisions in its share 
plans, the deferral applied to the 
annual bonus, and the holding 
period applied to the LTIP.

As a Committee, we believe that ongoing 
dialogue with our major shareholders 
is of key importance. Should you have 
any queries or feedback in relation to 
the Directors’ remuneration report, 
please contact me through the 
Company Secretary.

Dr Alison Fielding
Remuneration Committee Chair
13 October 2020

Remuneration Committee report continued

Annual report on remuneration

The Annual report on remuneration 
section of this report provides details 
of the amounts earned by Directors in 
respect of the year ended 31 July 2020 
and how the Directors’ remuneration 
policy will be operated for the year 
commencing 1 August 2020. This section 
of the report will be subject to an 
advisory vote at the 2020 AGM.

Remuneration decisions in respect 
of the year ended 31 July 2020

As referred to in the 2019 Directors’ 
remuneration report, our Executive 
Directors’ salaries for the year ended 
31 July 2020 were increased by 3% in 
line with the average increase for all 
other staff and followed a year of no 
increase in 2018. However, as noted in 
the Remuneration Committee Chair’s 
statement on page 56, the Executive 
Directors’ salaries were temporarily 
reduced by 20% with effect from 
1 April 2020.

The 2020 bonus opportunity for the 
Executive Directors was based on a 
combination of financial and corporate 
measures and challenging personal 
objectives. The Remuneration Committee 
determined that neither of the corporate 
financial targets were achieved. As a 
result, no bonus was therefore payable in 
respect of performance against the 
Executive Directors’ personal targets. 
While no bonus was payable against 
these latter personal objectives, 
performance has still been disclosed. 
Further information is set out on pages 
68 and 69.

The LTIP awards granted in December 
2017 failed to achieve their performance 
targets for the three years ending 31 July 
2020 and consequently lapsed. No other 
long-term incentive awards vested. 
Further LTIP information is set out on 
page 69.

No long-term incentive awards were 
granted in the year under the LTIP. This 
reflected the Company’s financial 
position and also the Formal Sales 
Process which was ongoing for five 
months of the year and during which 
time no LTIPs could be awarded. Awards 
in the form of nil-cost options were granted 
on 31 October and 10 December in respect 
of the annual bonus awarded for the 
prior year, as part of the Deferred Bonus 
Plan (which is open to all members of staff). 

Remuneration in the year 
commencing 1 August 2020

With the addition of the small change 
to the Directors’ remuneration policy 
approved at the AGM in December 2019, 
the Directors’ remuneration policy will 
be applied as follows in the year 
commencing 1 August 2020:

  Base salaries for the Executive team 

will be unchanged from the prior year. 

  The freeze in the base salaries of 

each of the Executive Directors is in 
line with the decision for staff wages 
generally though it is intended that 
the staff salary cut will be reviewed in 
October 2020 and will be reversed if 
circumstance allow at that time. The 
salary reductions for the Board will 
remain in place and will be reviewed 
in March 2021.

  For the year commencing 1 August 

2020, employer pension contributions 
above the amount of any salary 
sacrifice (and the associated 
employer National Insurance 
contribution savings) will continue 
to be capped at 5% of salary. 

  The annual bonus opportunity for 

Executive Directors will remain at 100% 
of salary, subject to the achievement 
of stretching performance conditions. 
The details of the proposed targets, 
to the extent they are not disclosed 
on page 74, will be disclosed once 
they are not commercially sensitive.

  LTIP awards for the year commencing 
1 August 2020 will be set in line with 
the approved policy which specifies 
an award level of 100% (and up to 
250% in exceptional circumstances). 
LTIP awards are ordinarily made in the 
period following the announcement of 
the Group’s annual results though the 
approved policy also allows for the 
Board to vary this timing at its 
discretion. The Committee notes the 
lapsing in full of the awards made in 
2017 and that no awards were made 
in 2019. The intended awards to be 
made to the continuing Executives 
and to Michael Edelman in October 
are set out in the relevant sections of 
this report. The targets and weightings 
for any award in FY21 will be announced 
if and when any awards are made.

058

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceDirectors’ remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

This part of the report sets out the Company’s forward-looking Directors’ remuneration policy that was subject to a binding 

vote at the AGM on 13 December 2018 (as amended in December 2019) and is scheduled to continue in operation for three 
years. The Directors’ remuneration policy is not audited.

Element and purpose

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Base salary

Core element of fixed remuneration 
that provides the basis to recruit 
and retain talent necessary to 
deliver the business strategy.

Normally reviewed annually; applied 
from 1 August (or more frequently 
if required).

No maximum. Annual increase normally 
in line with the wider workforce. Larger 
increases:

N/A

Consideration is given to the following:

  on promotion or changes in scope 

  the role, responsibility and 

or responsibility;

experience of the individual;

  an individual’s performance in a role;

  corporate and individual 

  where there has been a change in 

performance;

market practice; or

Benefits

Provide a market-competitive 
benefits package and promote the 
wellbeing of employees.

Retirement benefits

Provide market-competitive 
post-employment benefits to 
recruit and retain Directors of the 
calibre required for the business.

  market comparators such as 
equivalent roles – by size and 
complexity; and

  other Nanoco salary increases.

The Company provides life assurance 
of eight times salary, for all Executive 
Directors.

Directors are reimbursed for out-of-pocket 
expenses incurred on Company business 
and any associated tax where the 
expenses are wholly and necessarily 
for business purposes.

Benefits are reviewed periodically, 
taking individual circumstances into 
consideration. Benefits provided may 
include, for example, medical insurance, 
relocation expenses, expatriate 
allowances and travel expenses.

The Company currently operates a 
salary sacrifice pension arrangement 
under which Executives may elect to 
sacrifice salary and the Company pays 
an amount equal to the amount of the 
salary sacrifice, together with the 
employer National Insurance saved, 
into a private pension scheme.

Executive Directors are also eligible to 
participate in the Company’s defined 
contribution scheme (or such other 
pension plan as may be deemed 
appropriate). In appropriate 
circumstances, such as where the 
lifetime allowance is protected, 
Executive Directors are permitted 
to take an equal cash supplement 
(this would not count towards the 
bonus or LTIP opportunity).

  if there is a change in the size and/or 

complexity of the business.

N/A

No absolute maximum. The value 
of benefits is set at a level which 
the Committee considers to be 
appropriately positioned taking 
into account relevant market factors 
based on the nature and location of 
the role, the level of benefits provided 
to other employees in the Group and 
individual circumstances.

For the year commencing 1 August 2020, 
employer pension contributions above 
the amount of any salary sacrifice and 
employer NIC saved have again been 
capped at 5.0% (2019: 5.0%) of salary.

N/A

An overall contribution limit of up to 10% 
of base salary may be made in future 
years (in addition to the amount of any 
salary sacrifice and employer NIC saved) 
to take account of circumstances 
including, but not limited to, a change 
in the scope of the role, an increase in 
responsibility and/or a change in the 
size and/or complexity of the business.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 059

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Element and purpose

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Annual bonus

Rewards and incentivises the 
achievement of annual objectives 
which are aligned with key financial 
and strategic goals that support 
the enhancement of shareholder 
value.

Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)

To reflect stakeholder philosophy, 
provide a longer-term retention 
mechanism and provide alignment 
with shareholders.

Shareholding requirement

To align Directors to 
shareholder interests.

Performance targets are set annually 
and payout levels are determined after 
the year end following the Committee’s 
assessment of actual performance 
against set targets.

Maximum annual bonus opportunity 
is 100% of salary.

The percentage of maximum bonus 
payable for the different levels of 
performance would be no greater than:

Stretching performance 
targets are set each year, 
reflecting the business 
priorities that underpin 
Group strategy.

Below threshold 

Threshold   

On-target  

Maximum   

0%

25%

60%

100%

On target performance pays out at 
60% (and not 50%) as the Committee 
includes an element of stretch when 
setting targets.

Ordinarily, at least 75% will be 
subject to achievement of 
financial and/or corporate 
measures and the balance 
will be based on challenging 
personal objectives. The 
Committee retains discretion 
to apply different weightings 
in relevant circumstances.

The maximum value of shares over 
which an individual can be granted an 
award in respect of a financial year is 
normally 100% of base salary, although 
this limit may be increased to 250% of 
base salary in exceptional circumstances. 
The percentage of maximum awards for 
the different levels of performance 
would be no greater than:

Below threshold 

Threshold   

On-target  

Maximum   

0%

25%

60%

100%

On target performance pays out at 
60% (and not 50%) as the Committee 
includes an element of stretch when 
setting targets.

The vesting of LTIP awards is 
subject to the satisfaction of 
performance targets set by 
the Committee.

The performance measures 
are reviewed regularly to 
ensure they remain relevant 
but will be based on financial 
measures which link directly 
or indirectly to the creation of 
shareholder value (such as 
share price, revenue and EPS) 
and/or the achievement of 
strategic milestones.

The relevant metrics and the 
respective weightings may 
vary each year based on 
Company strategic priorities.

N/A

N/A

Up to 100% of any bonus earned can 
be paid in deferred shares under the 
DBP which vest after two years and 
the balance is awarded in cash.

Deferred share awards may incorporate 
the right to receive (in cash or shares) 
the value of the dividends that would 
have been paid on the shares that vest; 
this may assume the reinvestment of 
dividends into shares on such terms as 
the Committee determines.

Under the LTIP, awards of conditional 
shares, restricted stock or nil-cost 
options (or similar cash equivalent) 
can be made with vesting dependent 
on the achievement of performance 
conditions, normally over a three-year 
performance period.

Under the LTIP, there will be no retesting 
of performance following the end of the 
performance period.

After the end of the performance period 
the vested awards would normally be 
subject to a two-year holding period.

LTIP awards may incorporate the right 
to receive (in cash or shares) the value 
of the dividends that would have been 
paid on the shares that vest; this may 
assume the reinvestment of dividends 
into shares on such terms as the 
Committee determines.

A requirement to build up and hold 
a shareholding of at least 200% of 
base salary.

50% of vested shares under the DBP 
or LTIP (post-tax) are to be retained 
until the shareholding requirement 
has been met.

Notes to the policy table 

Application of clawback and malus to variable remuneration

Under the Deferred Bonus Plan (“DBP”), during the two-year deferral period, the Committee has the right to reduce any deferred 
bonus awards which have not yet been released in the event of a material misstatement of the Group’s financial results, a 
material misconduct on the part of the participant, a material corporate failure as determined by the Board or a material failure 
of risk management by the Group (i.e. a malus provision). For up to two years following the payment of a cash bonus award, the 
Committee may also require the repayment of some or all of the award in these circumstances (i.e. a clawback provision).

Under the 2015 LTIP, at any time prior to the end of the holding period for LTIP awards, the Committee in its discretion may reduce, 
cancel or impose further conditions on LTIP awards which have not yet been released in the event of a material misstatement 
of the Group’s financial results, a material misconduct on the part of the participant, a material corporate failure as determined 
by the Board or a material failure of risk management by the Group.

060

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceDirectors’ remuneration policy continued

Notes to the policy table continued

Explanation of performance measures chosen

Selected performance measures for the annual bonus and LTIP awards reflect the Group’s strategy. Stretching performance 
targets are set each year by the Committee taking into account a number of different factors.

Annual bonus

At least 75% of the potential maximum annual bonus will be subject to achievement of a combination of financial and corporate 
measures, whilst the balance will be based on challenging personal objectives. The Committee will disclose the metrics and 
performance against these on a retrospective basis to the extent that these are not commercially sensitive.

LTIP

The Company historically used commercial revenue targets as its primary measure for LTIP awards for Executive Directors. 
However, the Committee recognises that the Company’s transition from a research and development company to a commercial, 
product-driven organisation presents a number of challenges to defining meaningful and appropriate performance metrics and 
targets. The Committee has opted therefore for awards granted under the LTIP in 2018 and any potential award in 2020 to be based 
on share price growth which has the benefit of being absolutely aligned to long-term shareholder interests and is not subject to 
the same risk of unearned reward or absence of reward due to unforeseen one-off significant contracts. This metric will be subject 
to a performance underpin to ensure that the share price metric for the LTIP does not lead to behaviours that are divergent from 
the core commercialisation strategy and that appropriate developments are made in all areas of the business. It is the Committee’s 
view that this combination is the most appropriate performance measure at present for determining LTIP vesting for the awards 
on the basis that share price growth is a key measure of value delivered to shareholders and should reflect the achievement 
of commercial milestones. This ensures that this element only vests where significant value is delivered to shareholders.

The Committee intends to review each year the performance metrics for future awards taking into account the business priorities 
and strategy at that time.

The Committee also retains the discretion to adjust or set different performance measures or targets where it considers it 
appropriate to do so (for example, to reflect a change in strategy, a material acquisition and/or a divestment of a Group business 
or a change in prevailing market conditions) and to assess performance on a fair and consistent basis from year to year.

Operation of the LTIP and DBP

The LTIP and DBP are operated by the Committee in accordance with their respective rules, including the ability to adjust the 
number of shares subject to awards in the event of a variation of share capital, demerger, delisting, special dividend, rights issue 
or other event which may, in the opinion of the Company, affect the current or future value of shares. The “market value” of a 
share for the purposes of determining the number of shares subject to the LTIP or DBP award will be the average share price over 
the three dealing days following the announcement of results preceding the grant date, unless the Committee determines that 
an alternative basis should apply but would still be by reference to market prices such as the average price over the three-day 
period leading up to an award at a different date. All members of staff are eligible to participate in both schemes.

Early vesting of awards

As described on pages 64 and 65, awards under the DBP and LTIP may vest earlier than anticipated in “good leaver” circumstances.

On a change of control of the Company or other relevant corporate event (such as a demerger, delisting, special dividend 
or other event which may affect the value of an award), the extent to which unvested awards will vest will be determined 
in accordance with the rules of the relevant plan.

Awards under the DBP will vest in full in the event of a takeover, merger or other relevant corporate event.

Awards under the LTIP may vest early on a takeover, merger or other relevant corporate event. The Committee will determine the 
level of vesting taking into account the extent to which the performance conditions are satisfied and the perceived value created 
as a result of such an event. Such vesting would ordinarily be on a time pro-rata basis, although the Committee has discretion 
not to apply time pro-rating.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 061

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ remuneration policy continued

How the Executive Directors’ remuneration policy relates to the Group

The remuneration policy summarised previously provides an overview of the structure that operates for the Executive Directors. 
The same broad structure also operates for the members of the Senior Management team, although with lower levels of 
participation in the annual bonus, the DBP and/or the LTIP. For other employees, the same remuneration principles are applied 
and the Company aims to provide a remuneration package that is competitive in an employee’s country of employment and 
which is appropriate to promote the long-term success of the Group.

Remuneration outcomes in different performance scenarios

The charts below set out an illustration of the remuneration policy for FY21. The charts provide an illustration of the proportion 
of total remuneration made up of each component of the remuneration policy and the potential value of each component.

Five scenarios have been illustrated for each Executive Director:

Below threshold performance Fixed remuneration

No annual bonus payout

No vesting under the LTIP

Threshold performance 

Fixed remuneration

25% annual bonus payout (25% of salary)

25% vesting under the LTIP (50% of salary in the case of Brian Tenner, 37.5% of salary in the case 
of Nigel Pickett)

Target performance

Fixed remuneration

60% annual bonus payout (60% of salary)

60% vesting under the LTIP (120% of salary in the case of Brian Tenner, 90% of salary in the case 
of Nigel Pickett)

Maximum performance

Fixed remuneration

100% annual bonus payout (100% of salary)

100% vesting under the LTIP (200% of salary in the case of Brian Tenner, 150% of salary in the case 
of Nigel Pickett)

Maximum + 50% share price 
increase

Fixed remuneration

100% annual bonus payout (100% of salary)

100% vesting under the LTIP (200% of salary in the case of Brian Tenner, 150% of salary in the case 
of Nigel Pickett) plus an assumed 50% increase in share price from grant date

Brian Tenner

Dr Nigel Pickett

1,200,000

1,000,000

n
o
i
t
a

r
e
n
u
m
e
r

l

a
t
o
T

800,000

600,000

400,000

200,000

£1,118,323

£896,873

59%

£631,133

49%

£398,610.5

28%

14%

58%

£232,523

100%

42%

21%

25%

20%

37%

26%

21%

0

Below 
threshold
performance

Threshold 
performance

Target
performance

Maximum
performance

Maximum + 
50% share 
price increase

1,200,000

1,000,000

800,000

600,000

400,000

£352,260

n
o
i
t
a

r
e
n
u
m
e
r

l

a
t
o
T

28%

14%

58%

200,000

£205,485

100%

0

Below 
threshold
performance

£792,585

£988,285

59%

£557,745

49%

42%

21%

25%

20%

37%

26%

21%

Threshold 
performance

Target
performance

Maximum
performance

Maximum + 
50% share 
price increase

 Fixed pay 

 Annual bonus 

 LTIP

 Fixed pay 

 Annual bonus 

 LTIP

062

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governance 
 
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Remuneration outcomes in different performance scenarios continued

Fixed pay currently comprises the following elements (before the temporary 20% reduction applied to base salaries):

Chief Executive Officer – Brian Tenner

Chief Technical Officer – Dr Nigel Pickett

Current
base salary

£221,450

£195,700

Benefits 1

Pension 2

Total

—

—

£11,073 £232,523

£9,785 £205,485

1 

 No benefits are currently provided to the Executive Directors other than under the Group life assurance scheme, the value of which in the case of the 
Executive Directors cannot be identified as noted on page 67.

2  Based on 5% employer pension contribution/cash supplement in lieu of pension which applies for the year ended 31 July 2021.

The values illustrated assume a constant share price from the time of grant of LTIPs and do not take into account share price 
fluctuation or dividend equivalents that may be received under the share plans. The ultimate amounts received by the Directors 
may be higher or lower than the amounts illustrated above.

Remuneration policy for Non-Executive Directors

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Other items

To enable the Company to 
attract and retain Non-
Executive Directors of the 
required calibre by offering 
market-competitive rates.

The Chairman’s fee is determined by the Committee 
and the fees of the other Non-Executive Directors 
are determined by the Board.

Fees take into account several factors, including 
the size and complexity of the business, fees paid 
at companies of a similar size and complexity, and 
the expected time commitment and contribution 
for the role.

Overall fees paid to Non-Executive Directors will 
remain within the limits set by the Company’s 
Articles of Association.

Non-Executive Directors are provided 
with directors’ and officers’ insurance 
and indemnity protection and are eligible 
to be reimbursed for any reasonable 
hotel and travelling expenses and other 
reasonable expenses incurred in the 
performance of their duties.

The Non-Executive Directors do not 
participate in the Company’s annual 
bonus, share plans or pension schemes.

Remuneration policy on recruitment

When hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will seek to align the remuneration package with the above policy. When 
determining appropriate remuneration arrangements, the Committee may include other elements of pay which it considers are 
appropriate and necessary in the circumstances. However, this discretion is capped and is subject to the limits referred to below:

  base salary will be set at a level appropriate to the role and the experience of the appointee. We may agree future increases 

up to a market rate, in line with increased experience and/or responsibilities, subject to good performance;

  benefits and pension contributions will only be provided in line with the above policy;

  the Committee will not offer non-performance related incentive payments (for example a “guaranteed sign-on bonus”);

  other elements may be included in the following circumstances:

  an interim appointment being made to fill an Executive Director role on a short-term basis;

  if exceptional circumstances require the Chairman or a Non-Executive Director to take on a short-term executive function;

  if an Executive Director is recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a bonus or long-term 

incentive award for that year as there would not be sufficient time to assess performance. Subject to the limit on variable 
remuneration set out below, the quantum in respect of the months employed during the year may be transferred to the 
subsequent year so that reward is provided on a fair and appropriate basis; and

  if the Director will be required to relocate in order to take up the position, it is the Company’s policy to allow reasonable 

relocation, travel and subsistence payments. Any such payments will be at the discretion of the Committee;

  the Committee may also alter the performance measures, performance period and vesting period of the annual bonus or LTIP, 

if the Committee determines that the circumstances of the recruitment merit such alteration. The rationale for any such 
alterations will be clearly explained in the next Directors’ remuneration report; and

  the maximum level of variable remuneration which may be granted (excluding “buyout” awards as referred to below) is 350% of 

salary, in line with the policy set out on pages 59 and 60.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 063

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Remuneration policy on recruitment continued

The Committee may make payments or awards in respect of hiring an employee to “buy out” remuneration arrangements 
forfeited on leaving a previous employer. In doing so, the Committee will take account of relevant factors, including any 
performance conditions attached to the forfeited arrangements and the time over which they would have vested or been 
paid. The Committee will generally seek to structure buyout awards or payments on a comparable basis to the remuneration 
arrangements forfeited. Any such payments or awards are excluded from the maximum level of variable remuneration referred 
to previously. “Buyout” awards will ordinarily be granted on the basis that they are subject to forfeiture or “clawback” in the event 
of departure within twelve months of joining the Company, although the Committee will retain discretion not to apply forfeiture 
or clawback in appropriate circumstances.

Any share awards referred to in this section will be granted as far as possible under the Company’s existing share plans. 
If necessary, and subject to the limits referred to above, recruitment awards may be granted outside of these plans.

Where a position is filled internally, any ongoing remuneration obligations or outstanding variable pay elements shall be allowed 
to continue in accordance with their terms.

Fees payable to a newly appointed Chairman or Non-Executive Director will be in line with the policy in place at the time 
of appointment.

External appointments

The Company recognises that Executive Directors may be invited to become non-executive directors of other companies and 
that this can help broaden the skills and experience of a Director. Subject to the approval of the Board, Executive Directors are 
normally permitted to accept external appointments and may retain fees for such appointments where no significant actual 
or potential conflict of interest arises and provided that the Director is able to maintain his time commitment to the Company.

Payment for loss of office

The Company’s policy is that Executive Directors’ service contracts should be capable of termination on not more than twelve 
months’ notice. The principles on which the determination of payments for loss of office will be approached are set out below:

Element

Policy

Payment in lieu 
of notice

The Company has discretion to make a payment in lieu of notice which would include base salary and 
benefits for the unexpired period of notice, up to a maximum of twelve months’ notice.

Annual bonus

At the Committee’s discretion, on an individual basis, any annual bonus award will be dependent on a 
number of factors, such as the circumstances of departure and their contribution to the business during 
the period. Any bonus will normally be pro-rated for time and will be paid at the usual time (although the 
Committee retains discretion to pay the annual bonus award earlier in appropriate circumstances). Any such 
bonus can, at the discretion of the Committee, be paid wholly in cash.

DBP

Determined in accordance with the rules of the DBP.

Unvested awards will normally lapse on cessation of employment. However, at the Committee’s discretion, 
if a participant is deemed to be a “good leaver” (such as leaving due to death, ill health, injury, disability, 
redundancy or the sale of his employer), the Committee shall determine whether any unvested award will vest 
at cessation or at the normal vesting date. In either case, the extent of vesting will be determined by the 
Committee, taking into account, unless the Committee determines otherwise, the period of time elapsed from 
the date of grant to the date of cessation relative to the deferral period. Awards may then be exercised 
during such period as the Committee determines.

Awards (in the form of nil-cost options) which have vested but remain unexercised at the date of cessation 
may be exercised if a participant is a good leaver at the discretion of the Committee. Awards may then be 
exercised for such period as the Committee determines.

064

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceDirectors’ remuneration policy continued

Payment for loss of office continued

Element

LTIP

Policy

Determined in accordance with the rules of the shareholder approved LTIP.

Unvested awards will normally lapse on cessation of employment. However, if a participant is deemed to be a 
good leaver, the Committee shall determine whether the award is released on the normal release date or the 
date of cessation (or on some other date). The extent of vesting will be determined by the Committee taking 
into account the extent to which the performance condition is satisfied and, unless the Committee 
determines otherwise, the period of time elapsed from the date of grant to the date of cessation relative to 
the performance period. Awards may then be exercised during such period as the Committee determines.

If a participant leaves for any reason (other than summary dismissal) after an award has vested but before it 
has been released (i.e. during the holding period), his award will ordinarily continue to the normal release date 
when it will be released to the extent it vested. The Committee retains discretion to release awards when the 
participant leaves. If the participant is summarily dismissed, their award will lapse. Awards (in the form of 
nil-cost options) which have vested and been released but remain unexercised at the date of cessation may 
be exercised if a participant is deemed to be a good leaver. Awards may then be exercised for such period 
as the Committee determines.

Mitigation

The Committee’s practice is that if an Executive Director’s employment is terminated any compensation 
payment will be calculated in accordance with normal legal principles including the application of mitigation 
to the extent appropriate to the circumstances of the termination.

Other payments

In appropriate circumstances, payments may also be made in respect of accrued holiday, outplacement and 
legal fees.

Where a buyout award had been made, the leaver provisions would be determined at the time of the award.

The Committee reserves the right to make additional exit payments where such payments are made in good faith in discharge 
of an existing legal obligation (or by way of damages for breach of such an obligation) or by way of settlement or compromise 
of any claim arising in connection with the termination of a Director’s office or employment.

Where the Committee retains discretion it will be used to provide flexibility in certain situations, taking into account the particular 
circumstances of the Director’s departure and performance.

There is no entitlement to any compensation in the event of Non-Executive Directors’ fixed-term agreements not being renewed 
or the agreement terminating earlier.

Consideration of employees’ pay

The Committee generally considers pay and employment conditions elsewhere in the Company when considering the Directors’ 
remuneration. When considering base salary increases, the Committee reviews overall levels of base pay increases offered to 
other employees. Employees are not actively consulted on Directors’ remuneration. Employee share ownership is fundamental 
to the Company’s culture and is reflected in the wide participation in our share incentive plans.

Existing contractual arrangements

The Committee retains discretion to make any remuneration payment and/or payment for loss of office outside the policy in this report:

  where the terms of the payment were agreed before the policy came into effect provided that, in the case of any payment 
agreed on or after 13 December 2019, they are in line with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved at the 2018 AGM;

  where the terms of the payment were agreed at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Company 
and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment was not in consideration of the individual becoming a Director of the 
Company; and

  to satisfy contractual commitments under legacy remuneration arrangements.

For these purposes, “payments” includes the satisfaction of awards of variable remuneration and, in relation to an award over 
shares, the terms of the payment are agreed at the time the award is granted.

Consultation with shareholders

The Committee considers shareholder feedback received on remuneration matters, as well as any additional comments received 
during any other meetings with shareholders. The Committee consulted with major shareholders in respect of the changes to the 
remuneration policy that was proposed and agreed at the 2018 AGM.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 065

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration

This report sets out details of the amounts earned during 2020 and provides details as to how the Committee intends to 
implement the policy during 2021. This part of the report will be subject to an advisory shareholder vote at the 2020 AGM. 
This report contains unaudited information except where stated that it is audited.

Remuneration Committee

The Committee comprises Dr Alison Fielding, who is Chair of the Committee, Chris Batterham and Dr Christopher Richards, 
each of whom is considered to be independent. The Committee may invite anyone it deems appropriate to attend and 
advise at meetings, including the Chief Executive Officer, although no Director is present when their own remuneration is being 
discussed. The Committee is responsible for establishing a formal and transparent procedure for developing policy on executive 
remuneration and for setting the remuneration of the Directors and certain senior management, as well as reviewing the 
performance of the Executive Directors of the Company. The terms of reference of the Remuneration Committee can be found 
in the Investor section of the Group’s website.

The Committee met three times during the year; its meetings are minuted and its recommendations are presented to the Board.

Policy on other appointments

The Board believes that Directors should be able to accept other appointments where no significant actual or potential 
conflicts of interest arise and provided that the Director is able to maintain his time commitment to the Company. These other 
appointments enable Directors to accrue further skills and experience from which the Company benefits. This policy is reviewed 
annually. None of the Executive Directors had any other external appointments during the year ended 31 July 2020.

Advisers to the Committee

The Chief Executive Officer is consulted on the remuneration of those who report directly to him and also of other senior 
executives. No Executive Director or employee is present or takes part in discussions in respect of matters relating directly 
to their own remuneration. During the year, the Committee was assisted in its work by the following external consultants:

Adviser

Details of appointment

Services provided by the adviser

Fees paid for remuneration advice

Other services in FY20

Deloitte LLP 
(“Deloitte”)

Appointed by the 
Remuneration 
Committee in June 2015.

Various advice on executive 
remuneration.

Advice to management 
in relation to the Directors’ 
remuneration report.

The fees for advice provided 
to the Committee during the 
financial year were £13,500 
(2019: £10,600).

Charged on a time/cost 
basis or fixed fee depending 
on project.

Deloitte is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operates under its Code of Conduct in 
relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. The Remuneration Committee took into account the Code of Conduct 
when reviewing the appointment of Deloitte. The Committee is satisfied that the remuneration advice provided by Deloitte is 
objective and independent.

066

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAnnual report on remuneration continued

Single total figure of remuneration for 2020 – Executive Directors (audited information)

The remuneration of the Directors who served on the Board of Nanoco Group plc during the year to 31 July 2020 is as follows 
(footnotes for both tables are below the second table):

Base
salary
and fees 1
£’000

Benefits
in kind 2
£’000

Annual
bonus
in cash
£’000

Annual
bonus
in shares
£’000

Long-term
incentives
£’000

Pension 3
£’000

Total 2020
£’000

Total
fixed
remuneration

Total
variable
remuneration

Executive Directors

Dr Nigel Pickett

Brian Tenner

Total Executive Directors

Former Executive Directors

Dr Michael Edelman4

Non-Executive Directors

Dr Christopher Richards

Dr Alison Fielding

Christopher Batterham

Total Non-Executive Directors

Total 

186

208

394

307

88

41

41

170

871

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

10

11

21

16

—

—

—

—

37

196

219

415

196

219

415

323

323

88

41

41

170

908

88

41

41

170

908

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

The remuneration of the Directors who served on the Board of Nanoco Group plc during the year to 31 July 2019 was as follows:

Base
salary
and fees 1
£’000

Benefits
in kind 2
£’000

Annual
bonus
in cash
£’000

Annual
bonus
in shares
£’000

Long-term
incentives
£’000

Pension 3
£’000

Total 2019
£’000

Total
fixed
remuneration

Total
variable
remuneration

Executive Directors

Dr Nigel Pickett

Brian Tenner5

Total Executive Directors

Former Executive Directors

Dr Michael Edelman4

David Blain6

Keith Wiggins7

Total Former Executive Directors

Non-Executive Directors

Dr Christopher Richards

Dr Alison Fielding

Chris Batterham8

Brendan Cummins9

Total Non-Executive Directors

Total 

190

205

395

322

146

80

548

90

41

15

29

175

1,118

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

100

119

219

167

—

—

167

— 

— 

—

—

—

386

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

10

10

20

16

—

4

20

—

—

—

—

—

300

334

634

505

146

84

735

90

41

15

29

175

200

215

415

338

146

84

568

90

41

15

29

175

100

119

219

167

—

—

167

— 

— 

—

—

—

40

1,544

1,158

386

1 

 If less than a year was served, salary or fees are from the date of appointment or to the date of retirement. The Executive Directors’ salaries shown 
include the impact of the temporary 20% salary reduction that took effect on 1 April 2020 and are shown before any salary sacrifice pension 
contributions. The Non-Executive Directors’ salaries shown include the impact of the temporary 35% salary reduction that took effect on 1 April 2020.

2   Benefits in kind are shown at the taxable value of benefits received in the year. The life cover provided to Executive Directors is contained within a policy 

covering all employees and it is not possible to identify the proportion of the premium in respect of either Directors individually or as a whole.

3   The pension figure represents the cash value of Company pension contributions and/or cash in lieu of pension contributions. This does not include the 
amount of the salary sacrifice paid as a pension but does include the employer National Insurance saved that is paid into a private pension scheme.

4   Dr Michael Edelman stepped down from the Board and his role as CEO on 1 September 2020. His remuneration is paid in US Dollars but reported in 
Sterling for the purpose of this table. The exchange rate used for this purpose varied throughout the year. The rates used were in the range of 1.215 
to 1.336 in FY20 and 1.3042 to 1.4195 in FY19. Information on payments for loss of office and other payments to be made are set out below.

5   Brian Tenner was appointed to the Board on 20 August 2018.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 067

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued

Single total figure of remuneration for 2020 – Executive Directors (audited information) continued

6   David Blain resigned from the Board on 20 August 2018 and left employment on 15 October 2018 after an orderly handover to Brian Tenner. Information in 
relation to payments made in respect of loss of office is set out in 2019’s Annual Report and Accounts. David Blain’s LTIP award granted in December 2017 
lapsed as a result of the performance targets not being achieved, as referred to on page 69.

7   Keith Wiggins resigned on 10 June 2018. The single total figure of remuneration above details remuneration earned by Keith Wiggins in the financial year 

to the end of his employment on 31 December 2018. Information on payments for loss of office and other payments made is set out in 2018’s Annual 
Report and Accounts.

8  Christopher Batterham was appointed to the Board on 1 April 2019.

9  Brendan Cummins resigned from the Board on 19 April 2019. As a Non-Executive Director he received no payments in respect of loss of office.

Individual elements of remuneration for the year ended 31 July 2020

Base salary

Base salaries (before 20% pay reductions) were increased in line with other staff by 3% in the year ended 31 July 2020.

Annual bonus

For the year ended 31 July 2020, the maximum bonus for Dr Michael Edelman, Dr Nigel Pickett and Brian Tenner was 100% 
of salary. The annual bonuses comprise two elements: financial corporate objectives (80% of salary) and personal objectives 
(20% of salary). Bonuses for personal objectives are only payable if financial corporate objectives are achieved. 

Financial targets were not achieved during the year and hence no bonuses were payable in respect of personal targets either. 
Performance against financial and personal targets is shown in the table below with the financial and corporate measures and 
their weighting as a percentage of salary for the year ended 31 July 2020:

Measure and weighting as a percentage 
of salary

Threshold performance level Maximum performance level

Performance achieved

Bonus earned as a
percentage of salary

Revenue and other operating 
income (60%)

£6.7m

£10.0m

£4.0m

Adjusted LBITDA (20%)

Loss of £2.2m

Loss of £0.3m

Loss of £3.0m

Nil

Nil

The personal objectives and amounts payable in respect of them are set out in the table below.

Specific bonus targets have not been disclosed by the Committee where they are considered to be commercially sensitive. 
The current stage of the Group’s development means certain retrospective information could still give competitors insight into 
the strategic plans of the business, which is not in the interest of shareholders.

Director

Measure

Dr Michael Edelman

Financial and corporate measures

Personal objectives

Execute all activities for the Formal Sales Process

Deliver new JDA contract

Deliver one additional major new customer

Dr Nigel Pickett

Financial and corporate measures

Personal objectives

Execute all activities for the Formal Sales Process

Execute new JDA contract

Deliver new scalable materials (sensing and display)

Brian Tenner

Financial and corporate measures

Personal objectives

Weighting
(% of maximum
bonus opportunity)

80

20

80

20

80

20

Achievement
(% of salary)

Nil

Nil 

Partially achieved 

Not achieved

Partially achieved

Nil

Nil 

Partially achieved 

Not achieved

Achieved

Nil

Nil 

Execute all activities for the Formal Sales Process

Partially achieved 

Improve support functions’ performance

Prepare Runcorn for scale manufacturing

Achieved

Achieved

068

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAnnual report on remuneration continued

Long-term incentives vesting in respect of the year ended 31 July 2020

No long-term incentives vested during the year ended 31 July 2020. The LTIP awards granted in December 2017 were subject to 
performance conditions assessed over the three financial years ended 31 July 2020. The threshold targets were not achieved and 
consequently all of the awards have lapsed:

Three-year revenue

Share price

LTIP awards granted in 2020

Threshold 
target

Maximum 
target

Outcome

£28.0m

£58.0m

No awards vest

£1.05

£1.60

No awards vest

No LTIP awards were made to the Executive Directors in the year ending 31 July 2020. This reflects the Formal Sales Process which 
was underway for much of the year and effectively prevented the issue of new LTIPs. 

Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited information)

Directors’ interests in share options to acquire ordinary shares of 10 pence in the Company as at 31 July 2020 (or, if earlier, the 
date on which they stepped down from the Board) were, including Deferred Bonus Plan:

Share options

Dr Michael Edelman

Dr Nigel Pickett

Brian Tenner

Date granted

Exercise
price

At
1 August 2019

25 Nov 2011

50.00p 500,000 1

22 Oct 2012

57.00p 1,000,000 1

6 Dec 2017 

7 Nov 2018 

1 Nov 2019 4 

10 Dec 2019 4

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

1,149,106 2

923,824 3

—

—

25 Nov 2011

50.00p 500,000 1

22 Oct 2012

57.00p

750,000 1

22 Nov 2016 4

6 Dec 2017

7 Nov 2018

1 Nov 2019 4 

10 Dec 2019 4 

7 Nov 2018

1 Nov 2019 4 

10 Dec 2019 4 

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

66,576

653,137 2

549,398 3

—

—

1,021,086 3

—

—

Exercised
during
the year

—

—

Granted
during
the year 5

At
31 July
2020

— 500,000

— 1,000,000

Lapsed

—

—

— (1,149,106)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(653,137)

—

—

—

—

—

—

— 923,824

731,151

731,151

731,151

731,151

— 500,000

— 750,000

—

—

—

66,576

—

549,398

437,681

437,681

437,681

437,681

— 1,021,086

521,634

521,634

521,634

521,634

1  Vested but unexercised share options.

2  Lapsed at the year end as vesting conditions not met.

3  Unvested share options still subject to performance conditions.

4  Deferred Bonus Plan awards.

5   As described in the 2019 Directors’ remuneration report, the Directors’ remuneration policy was amended at the 2019 AGM to allow 100% of any annual bonus 

to be paid in shares under the Deferred Bonus Plan. 50% of the annual bonus earned for 2019 was awarded in the form of a Deferred Bonus Plan award granted 
on 1 November 2019, with the remaining 50% granted on 10 December 2019 following shareholder approval of the amendment at the 2019 AGM.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 069

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued

Director shareholdings

In order to align the interests of Executive Directors with those of shareholders and to demonstrate the Executive Directors’ 
ongoing personal financial commitment to the business, Executive Directors will be expected to build up a shareholding. Under 
the policy approved by shareholders at the 2019 AGM, the required holding was standardised at 200% of salary for all Executive 
Directors. Executive Directors are expected to retain 50% of any post-tax shares that vest under any share incentive plans until 
this shareholding is reached.

Dr Nigel Pickett holds shares substantially in excess of the shareholding guideline (c.950% of salary using the three-month 
average closing share price to the end of July 2020). Mr Brian Tenner, having joined the Company in August 2018, is building 
up a holding which currently stands at 44% of salary (122% including the minimum 50% Deferred Bonus Plan awards that must 
be retained until the minimum shareholding is achieved). Dr Michael Edelman holds shares equivalent to 72% of salary on the 
same basis (150% including the minimum Deferred Bonus Plan awards that must be retained). The value of his holding previously 
exceeded the 200% minimum threshold but has fallen below that level due to adverse movements in the share price.

Non-Executive Directors are not subject to the shareholding requirement.

Directors’ interests in the shares of the Company, including family and beneficial interests, at 31 July 2020 (or, if earlier, the date 
on which they stepped down from the Board) were:

Current Directors

Dr Christopher Richards

Dr Nigel Pickett 

Brian Tenner

Dr Alison Fielding

Christopher Batterham

Total for current Directors

Former Directors

Dr Michael Edelman 

Total for former Directors

Ordinary shares of 10p each

31 July
2020
Number

31 July
2020
%

31 July
2019
Number

31 July
2019
%

628,730

0.21

571,587

11,245,548

3.68

11,074,119 

592,375

239,157

153,571

0.19

0.08

0.05

535,232

210,586

125,000

12,859,381 

4.21 12,516,524 

1,330,448

0.44 1,324,734

1,330,448

0.44 1,324,734

0.20

3.87

0.19

0.07

0.04

4.37

0.46

0.46

Dr Michael Edelman stepped down from the Board as CEO on 1 September 2020. See page 71 for more details.

None of the Directors in office as at 31 July 2020 had any interests at that date in shares of any other Group company.

There were no changes in Directors’ shareholdings between 31 July 2020 and the publishing date of these accounts.

The market price for Nanoco shares as at 31 July 2020 was 16.54 pence per share; the highest and lowest prices during the year 
were 29.0 pence and 7.0 pence respectively.

Details of share options are set out in note 25 to the financial statements.

Dilution

The Company complies with the relevant institutional investor guidelines on employee share plans which state that in any 
ten-calendar-year period the Company may not issue more than 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company under 
the LTIP or any other employee share plan adopted by the Company. Including only option grants post admission to AIM and 
excluding any awards that have lapsed, the current dilution is 4.8%.

070

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAnnual report on remuneration continued

Payments to past Directors and payments for loss of office (audited information)

Dr Michael Edelman (stepped down from the Board and CEO role on 1 September 2020)

Having stood down from the Board and his role as CEO, Dr Michael Edelman remains an employee of the Group. It is intended 
that when his current notice period expires, or sooner by mutual agreement, he will take up a part-time employment contract 
with the Group based on an estimated time commitment of around two days per month. This part-time role will focus specifically 
on him being a Special Adviser to the Litigation Sub-Committee that the Group has established to monitor the Samsung 
litigation. The Litigation Sub-Committee is chaired by the Chairman and the other members are Dr Alison Fielding and Brian 
Tenner with Dr Michael Edelman in attendance as an adviser. It is envisaged that the Special Adviser role will continue until the 
litigation is resolved and is terminable on six months’ notice.

The Committee determined the remuneration arrangements and, in particular, the treatment of historical LTIP awards, having 
regard to Dr Edelman’s contribution to the Company and his future support to the Litigation Sub-Committee. Details of the 
remuneration payments made or to be made to Dr Michael Edelman are set out below:

Base salary 

Dr Michael Edelman will continue to receive his base salary, reduced by 20% in line with the Executives, through to the end of his 
notice period on 29 March 2021. During the period to 29 March 2021, Dr Michael Edelman’s notice period has been shortened to 
three months with the earliest release date being 1 December 2020. From 1 April 2021, in his role as Special Adviser, he will receive 
$35,000 per annum (approximately £26,600) and the notice period will be six months.

Pension

Dr Michael Edelman will continue to receive his 5% Company pension contribution through to the end of his notice period on 
29 March 2021, calculated on his unreduced base salary (in line with all staff and Executives on reduced salaries). No pension 
contributions are payable during the Special Adviser role.

Annual bonus 

No annual bonus is payable in respect of the year ending 31 July 2020 and none shall be payable for the year ending 31 July 2021. 
The Special Adviser role attracts no annual bonus.

Benefits

Dr Michael Edelman will continue to benefit from the Company life assurance scheme throughout his employment, with any 
benefit linked to the salary being paid at the relevant time.

LTIPs

Since he remains an employee, all of Dr Michael Edelman’s existing LTIPs and DBP options will continue in place (disclosed in the 
relevant tables in this report). It is anticipated that Dr Michael Edelman will receive an LTIP award equal to approximately 150% of 
his pro-rated salary for the year ending 31 July 2021. This award will be made as Dr Michael Edelman will have an important role 
to play as Special Adviser to the Litigation Sub-Committee where a successful outcome to the litigation could have a material 
impact on shareholder value.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 071

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued

Unaudited information

Historical comparative TSR performance graph

The performance graph below shows the Company’s total shareholder return (“TSR”) against the FTSE SmallCap over the period 
from 1 August 2010 to 31 July 2020. In the opinion of the Board, the FTSE SmallCap is the most appropriate index against which 
the TSR of the Company should be measured because it represents a broad equity market index of which the Company is 
a constituent member.

Total shareholder return

The graph shows the percentage return of an investment in the Company’s shares on 1 August 2010 compared with the 
percentage return of an investment notionally invested in the FTSE SmallCap index. 

300%

250%

200%

150%

100%

50%

0%

-50%

-100%

01/08/2012

01/08/2013

01/08/2014

01/08/2015

01/08/2016

01/08/2017

01/08/2018

01/08/2019

01/08/2020

 Nanoco 

 FTSE SmallCap

Ten-year view of CEO remuneration

CEO remuneration

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

Total remuneration 
(£’000)1

Annual bonus 
(% of max vesting)

LTIP (% of max 
vesting)

175

33

—

182

707

293

635

406

327

312

505

323

25

—

73

—

56

—

56

100

40

—

—

—

—

—

52

—

—

—

1 

 Dr Michael Edelman’s remuneration is paid in US Dollars but reported in Sterling in this table. The exchange rate used for this purpose varied during the year.

072

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAnnual report on remuneration continued

Unaudited information continued

Percentage change in the remuneration of the Board

The table below shows the percentage change in each Director’s salary, benefits and annual bonus between the current and 
previous financial year, and the average percentage change in the same remuneration over the same period in respect of the 
employees of the Company on a full-time equivalent basis. The average employee change has been calculated by reference 
to the mean of employee pay. 

Salary/fees2

Taxable benefits

Annual bonus

Average
employee

Brian
Tenner 1

Dr Nigel
Pickett

Dr Christopher
Richards

Dr Alison
Fielding

Christopher
Batterham 1

4%

N/A

34%

(6%)

N/A

(5%)

N/A

(100%)

(100%)

(16%)

N/A

N/A

2%

N/A

N/A

2%

N/A

N/A

1 

 Brian Tenner and Christopher Batterham were appointed to the Board during the 2019 financial year. To enable comparison and to provide meaningful 
reflection of the annual percentage change, their remuneration for that year has been annualised. 

2  As noted on page 56, the Executive Directors’ salaries were reduced by 20% and the Non-Executive Directors’ fees by 35% with effect from 1 April 2020.

Relative importance of spend on pay

The following table sets out the percentage change in dividends and the overall expenditure on pay (across the whole Company).

Dividends

Overall expenditure on pay

Average headcount

Year ended
31 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
31 July 2019
£’000

% change

—

4,164

72

—

—

5,729

(27.3%)

92

(22.0%)

The headcount data is included as the average pay rise for all staff in the prior year was 3.0% whereas the overall expenditure 
on pay decreased by 27.3%. The difference between the two is largely explained by changes in the average headcount during 
each year.

Implementation of policy for the year commencing 1 August 2020

Base salary

Base salaries are reviewed annually with effect from 1 August. For the year commencing 1 August 2020 Executive Directors will have 
their base salary frozen at the same level as last year which is the same position as the wider workforce as shown in the table below. 
A temporary 20% pay reduction was applied to the Executive Directors’ base salaries on 1 April 2020 and it remains in effect.

Chief Executive Officer – Brian Tenner

Chief Technical Officer – Dr Nigel Pickett

Changes to Non-Executive Directors’ fees

Temporary
80% of salary

2021

2020

% change

£221,450

£177,160 £221,450

£195,700 £156,560 £195,700

Nil

Nil

The Non-Executive Directors’ fees have also been frozen at the same level as last year. A temporary 35% pay reduction was 
applied to the Non-Executive Directors’ fees on 1 April 2020 and it remains in effect.

Chairman fee

NED base fee

Chair of Committee fee

2021
(contracted)

Temporary
65% of fee

2020

£100,000

£65,000 £100,000

£41,000

£26,650

£41,000

£5,000

£3,250

£5,000

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 073

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual report on remuneration continued

Unaudited information continued

Implementation of policy for the year commencing 1 August 2020 continued

Pension

The Company operates a salary sacrifice pension arrangement. For the year commencing 1 August 2020, employer pension 
contributions above the amount of any salary sacrifice (and the associated employer National Insurance contribution savings) 
will remain capped at 5% of salary.

Annual bonus

For the year ending 31 July 2021, the maximum annual bonus potential will be 100% of base salary for Executive Directors. 
Up to 100% of any such bonus earned can be paid as deferred shares under the DBP vesting after two years with any balance 
paid in cash. This reflects our stakeholder philosophy, provides a longer-term retention mechanism and provides alignment 
with shareholders.

Consistent with the 2020 annual bonus, performance will be assessed on the basis of a balanced scorecard approach in respect 
of performance measures. The balance between corporate financial objectives (80%) and personal objectives (20%) will be 
unchanged. The corporate financial measures for FY21 will include annual revenue and LBITDA weighted 60%:20% respectively. 
Any bonus is only payable if the financial targets are achieved. The Committee will disclose the metrics and performance against 
these on a retrospective basis to the extent that these are not commercially sensitive.

Clawback will apply to any cash bonus paid and malus provisions to any unvested deferred bonus award.

LTIP

The Committee intends to make awards of approximately 200% and 150% of salary to the CEO and the CTO respectively after the 
announcement of the Group’s full year results for the year ending 31 July 2020 (subject to market conditions at the time of award). 
The Committee considers that the new responsibilities for Brian Tenner, with no corresponding increase in salary, and the ongoing 
20% reduction in salary for both Executive Directors, merit awards exceeding the usual level of 100% of salary. The Committee will 
agree targets if and when any LTIP awards are made during FY21. All awards will continue to be in line with the approved 
remuneration policy. This will include a performance underpin and a two-year post vesting holding period.

Statement of voting 

The Company is committed to ongoing dialogue with its shareholders and takes an active interest in trying to ensure that as 
many shareholders as possible submit their votes in time for any shareholder meetings. The following table sets out the actual 
voting in respect of the resolutions to approve the Directors’ remuneration report and the Directors’ remuneration policy at the 
Company’s Annual General Meeting held on 5 December 2019.

Resolution

Votes
for

% for

Votes
against

% against

Votes
withheld

To approve the Directors’ remuneration report

To approve the Directors’ remuneration policy amendment

78,238,132

80,041,102

99.8%

164,580

0.2% 1,811,370

99.8%

155,767

0.2%

17,213

074

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAnnual report on remuneration continued

Unaudited information continued

Directors’ contracts

Executive Directors

It is the Group’s policy that Executive Directors should have contracts with an indefinite term, providing for one year’s notice.

Dr Michael Edelman1

Dr Nigel Pickett1

Brian Tenner

Date of contract

Date of appointment Notice from the Company

Notice from Director

27 June 2006

27 June 2006

27 June 2006

27 June 2006

30 July 2018

30 July 2018

12 months

12 months

6 months

12 months

12 months

6 months

1  Dr Michel Edelman and Dr Nigel Pickett had their notices served on 1 April 2020 as a precautionary measure to preserve the Group’s cash position.

Other than Dr Michael Edelman, who has stepped down from the Board, all Directors will offer themselves for re-election at each 
AGM in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code. Service contracts are available for inspection at the registered 
office of the Company.

Dr Christopher Richards (Chairman)

Dr Alison Fielding

Christopher Batterham

Non-Executive Directors

Date of letter of 
appointment

Date of appointment

Unexpired term of
contract on 31 July 2020

28 October 2015

11 November 2015

20 March 2017

20 April 2017

12 March 2019

1 April 2019

4 months

9 months

1.67 years 

All Non-Executive Directors are appointed for an initial three-year term and then on a rolling annual term. Non-Executive 
Directors’ appointments may be terminated on not less than three months’ notice from either party.

On behalf of the Board

Dr Alison Fielding
Remuneration Committee Chair
13 October 2020

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 075

Directors’ report

The Directors present their report 

and the audited financial 
statements for the Group and 
Parent Company for the year 

ended 31 July 2020.

Disclosures reported elsewhere in the Annual Report

The strategic review of the business of the Company and its subsidiaries is given on 
pages 6 to 35. Certain information required for disclosure in this report is provided in 
other appropriate sections of this Annual Report. These are set out in the table below:

Financial instruments

Details of the Group’s financial risk 
management objectives and policies 
are disclosed in note 3 to the 
financial statements.

Disclosure requirement

Financial results and dividends

Board and Committee meetings and Directors’ attendance

Directors’ biographical details and date of appointment

Corporate governance

Approach to risk management and principal risks

Research and development activities

Research and development

Directors’ remuneration

Pages

85 to 115

39

36 and 37

38 to 46

25 to 27

2 and 19

59 to 75

30 to 35

79

79

5 and 15

29

The principal activity of the Group is 
research and development, a review of 
which is included in the Chairman’s and 
Chief Executive Officer’s statements on 
pages 6 to 8 and 9 to 11 respectively.

Total research and development spend 
was £3.1 million (2019: £4.0 million). No 
development expenditure was capitalised 
in the period (2019: £nil) for the reasons 
provided in note 3(h) to the accounts.

Dividends

The Directors do not recommend payment 
of an ordinary dividend (2019: £nil).

Greenhouse gas emissions, employee engagement, disability, gender and human rights

Statement on disclosure to the external auditors

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Future developments

Going concern statement

Disclosures on financial instruments (note 28 to the consolidated financial statements)

111 to 114

The disclosures are, accordingly, incorporated into this report by reference.

Requirements of the Listing Rules

The following table provides references to where the information required 
by the Listing Rule 9.8.4R is disclosed:

Listing Rule requirement

Location

Information required in relation to the publication 
of unaudited financial information

Not applicable

Details of any long-term incentive schemes

Remuneration report

Directors who held office during the year and their 
interests in shares and share options in the Group

Remuneration report

Arrangements where a Director has waived historical 
or future emoluments from the Company

Remuneration report 
on Chairman’s fees

Details of business relationships with suppliers, 
customers and others

Strategic report

Details of any non-pre-emptive issues of equity 
for cash

Not applicable

Details of any non-pre-emptive issues of equity 
for cash by any unlisted major subsidiary

Details of UK Parent participation in a placing by 
a listed subsidiary

No such share allotments

No such share participations

Details of any contract of significance in which 
a Director is or was materially interested

No such contracts

Details of rules regarding the appointment and 
replacement of Directors

Remuneration report

Contracts of significance between the Company 
(or a subsidiary) and a controlling shareholder

No such contracts

Details of a waiver of dividends by a shareholder

No such waivers

Board statement in respect of relationship agreement 
with the controlling shareholder

No such agreements

076

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceAcquisition of the Company’s 
own shares

The Company made no purchases of its 
own shares in the period under review. As 
at 31 July 2020 the authority given by the 
shareholders at the 2019 Annual General 
Meeting is for the Company to make 
market purchases of up to £2,862,212 of 
the nominal value of its ordinary shares 
at a price per share of not less than 10 
pence, and not more than 5% above the 
average of the middle market quotations 
for ordinary shares of the Company for 
the five business days immediately 
preceding the day of purchase. This 
authority is being proposed for renewal 
at the 2020 Annual General Meeting.

Directors and their interests

The Directors who held office throughout the year and their interests are shown 
in the Remuneration report. As at 31 July 2020, none of the Directors had any 
interests in shares of any other Group company.

No Director had an interest in any contract that was significant in relation to the 
Group’s business at any time during the period.

Directors are formally subject to re-election at intervals of not more than three years 
but voluntarily submit themselves for re-election each year.

Directors’ indemnity insurance

The Group has maintained insurance in the form of a qualifying third party indemnity 
provision throughout the year for its Directors and officers against the consequences 
of actions brought against them in relation to their duties for the Group. This provision 
was in force through the financial year and remains in force as at the date of 
approval of the financial statements.

Share capital and funding

Substantial shareholders

As at 31 July 2020 share capital 
comprised 305.7 million ordinary shares 
of 10 pence each (2019: £286.2 million). 
There is only one class of share and all 
shares are fully paid. Full details of the 
Group’s and Company’s share capital 
movements during the period are given 
in note 24 to the financial statements.

Pursuant to the general provisions 
of the Articles of Association and 
prevailing legislation, there are no 
specific restrictions on the size of a 
holding. The Directors are not aware 
of any restrictions on the transfer of 
ordinary shares in the Company other 
than certain restrictions which may from 
time to time be imposed by law and 
regulations, e.g. insider trading laws, 
and pursuant to the Listing Rules of the 
Financial Conduct Authority whereby 
certain employees of the Company 
require prior approval from the Company 
to deal in the Company’s securities.

The Company is not aware of any 
agreements between shareholders 
that may result in restrictions on voting 
rights and the transfer of securities.

Details of shares under option 
are provided in note 25 to the 
financial statements.

The Company is aware that the following had an interest in 3% or more of the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company at 31 July 2020:

Substantial shareholders

Lombard Odier

Hargreaves Lansdown Asset Management

Mr Richard I Griffiths

Interactive Investor

Dr Nigel Pickett

HSDL

Barclays Smart Investor

Number
of ordinary
shares at
31 July 2020

69,840,776

42,326,574

32,931,890

17,592,296

11,245,548

10,568,457

9,595,019

% of
issued
share
capital

22.85

13.85

10.77

5.75

3.68

3.46

3.14

By 12 October 2020 the following parties had notified the Company that their 
shareholdings had changed since 31 July 2020 – Lombard Odier (23.0%) and Richard 
I Griffiths (8.8%). Apart from the foregoing, there were no other notified significant 
changes in the holdings between 31 July 2020 and the date the Annual Report and 
Accounts were signed.

Donations

No political donations were made in the year (2019: £nil). Charitable donations of £nil 
were made in the year (2019: £nil).

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 077

Directors’ report continued

Additional information 
for shareholders

With regard to the appointment and 
replacement of Directors, the Company 
is governed by its Articles of Association, 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 
2018, the Companies Act 2006 and 
related legislation.

The Articles themselves may be 
amended by special resolution of the 
shareholders. The Articles provide that 
Directors may be appointed by an 
ordinary resolution of the Company’s 
members or by a resolution of the 
Directors, provided that, in the latter 
instance, a Director appointed in this 
way retires and stands for election 
at the first Annual General Meeting 
following his appointment.

The Articles also provide that at every 
Annual General Meeting at least one-
third of the Directors retire by rotation 
and set out the circumstances in 
which and how they may be re-elected. 
The Company’s members may remove 
a Director by passing an ordinary 
resolution of which special notice has 
been given. The office of a Director 
shall be vacated in any of the following 
events: (a) if (but in the case of a Director 
holding any executive office subject 
to the terms of any contract of service 
between him and the Company) 
notification in writing, signed by the 
Director or otherwise authenticated in 
such manner as the other Directors may 
accept, is received by the Company from 
the Director that he is resigning or retiring 
from office as a Director, and such 
resignation or retirement has taken effect 
in accordance with its terms, or if he shall 
in writing offer to resign or retire and the 
Directors shall resolve to accept such 
offer; (b) if he becomes bankrupt or has 
a receiving order made against him or 
makes any arrangement or composition 
with his creditors generally in satisfaction 
of his debts or shall apply to the court for 
an interim order under section 253 of the 
Insolvency Act 1986; (c) if a registered 
medical practitioner who is treating the 
Director gives a written opinion to the 
Company stating that he has become 

physically or mentally incapable of 
acting as a Director and may remain so 
for more than three months; (d) if he is 
absent from meetings of the Directors for 
six successive months without leave, and 
his alternate Director (if any) shall not 
during such period have attended in 
his stead, and the Directors resolve 
that his office be vacated; (e) if he shall 
be removed from office by notice in 
writing served upon him signed by all 
his co-Directors, but so that if he holds 
an appointment to an executive office 
which automatically determines, as a 
result, such removal shall be deemed 
an act of the Company and shall have 
effect without prejudice to any claim for 
damages for breach of any contract of 
service between him and the Company; 
or (f) if he ceases to be a Director by 
virtue of any provision of the Companies 
Act or becomes prohibited by law from 
being a Director.

The powers of the Directors are 
determined by applicable legislation and 
the Company’s Articles of Association. 
As provided in those Articles, the Directors 
may exercise all the Company’s powers 
provided that the Articles or applicable 
legislation do not stipulate that any 
such powers must be exercised by 
the Company’s members. The Directors 
have been authorised to issue and allot 
ordinary shares, pursuant to the Articles, 
and have authority to make market 
purchases of shares. These powers are 
referred to shareholders at each Annual 
General Meeting for renewal. Any shares 
purchased may be cancelled or held 
as treasury shares.

Employment policies

The Group is committed to ensuring the 
health and safety of its employees in the 
workplace. This includes the provision of 
regular medical checks.

The Group supports the employment of 
disabled people where possible through 
recruitment, by retention of those who 
become disabled and generally through 
training, career development and promotion. 

The Group is committed to keeping 
employees as fully informed as possible 
with regard to the Group’s performance 
and prospects and seeks their views, 
wherever possible, on matters which 
affect them as employees.

Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code 

The statements of compliance with 
the principles of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code published by the 
FRC in 2018 are set out on page 40.

Foreign branches

The Group has just one foreign location, 
a subsidiary in the United States, which 
provides management services to the 
UK business.

Independent Auditors

PwC LLP held office during the year 
following an external tender process 
in 2018. PwC LLP have indicated their 
willingness to continue in office.

Ordinary resolutions to re-appoint PwC 
LLP as auditors and to authorise the 
Directors to agree their audit fee will 
be proposed at the forthcoming Annual 
General Meeting.

Annual General Meeting notice

The Annual General Meeting of the 
Company will be held on 3 December 2020 
at 11.00am, at the Company’s headquarters 
at 46 Grafton Street, Manchester M13 9NT. 
The notice convening the AGM, together 
with an explanation of the resolutions 
to be proposed at the meeting, will be 
sent to shareholders separately from 
this document.

On behalf of the Board

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

078

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governanceStatement of Directors’ responsibilities

The directors are responsible 

for preparing the Annual Report 
and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable 

law and regulation.

Company law requires the directors 
to prepare financial statements for 
each financial year. Under that law 
the directors have prepared the group 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by 
the European Union and company 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union. Under company law the 
directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that 
they give a true and fair view of the state 
of affairs of the group and company and 
of the profit or loss of the group and 
company for that period. In preparing 
the financial statements, the directors 
are required to:

  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;

  state whether applicable IFRSs as 

adopted by the European Union have 
been followed for the group financial 
statements and IFRSs as adopted 
by the European Union have been 
followed for the company financial 
statements, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained 
in the financial statements;

  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable and 
prudent; and

  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
group and company will continue 
in business.

  the group financial statements, which 
have been prepared in accordance 
with IFRSs as adopted by the European 
Union, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position 
and loss of the group; and

  the Directors’ Report includes a fair 
review of the development and 
performance of the business and the 
position of the group and company, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that 
it faces. 

In the case of each director in office 
at the date the Directors’ Report 
is approved:

  so far as the director is aware, there 
is no relevant audit information of 
which the group and company’s 
auditors are unaware; and

  they have taken all the steps that 

they ought to have taken as a director 
in order to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the group 
and company’s auditors are aware 
of that information. 

By order of the Board

Brian Tenner
Chief Executive Officer
13 October 2020

The directors are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the group 
and company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the group 
and company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the 
group and company and enable them 
to ensure that the financial statements 
and the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
comply with the Companies Act 2006 
and, as regards the group financial 
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the 
company’s website. Legislation in 
the United Kingdom governing the 
preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ 
from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Directors’ confirmations

The directors consider that the annual 
report and accounts, taken as a whole, 
is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the group and 
company’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy.

Each of the directors, whose names 
and functions are listed in the Corporate 
governance report confirm that, to the 
best of their knowledge:

  the company financial statements, 

which have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRSs as adopted 
by the European Union, give a true 
and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and loss of 
the company;

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 079

Independent auditors’ report to the members of Nanoco Group plc

Independence

We remained independent of the 
group in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our 
audit of the financial statements in the 
UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical 
Standard, as applicable to listed public 
interest entities, and we have fulfilled 
our other ethical responsibilities in 
accordance with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and 
belief, we declare that non-audit 
services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical 
Standard were not provided to the 
group or the company.

Other than those disclosed in note 
6 to the financial statements, we have 
provided no non-audit services to 
the group or the company in the period 
from 1 August 2019 to 31 July 2020.

Report on the audit of the 
financial statements

Opinion

In our opinion, Nanoco Group plc’s 
group financial statements and 
company financial statements 
(the “financial statements”):

  give a true and fair view of the state 
of the group’s and of the company’s 
affairs as at 31 July 2020 and of the 
group’s loss and the group’s and the 
company’s cash flows for the year 
then ended;

  have been properly prepared in 
accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) 
as adopted by the European Union 
and, as regards the company’s 
financial statements, as applied in 
accordance with the provisions of 
the Companies Act 2006; and

  have been prepared in accordance 

with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006 and, as regards 
the group financial statements, Article 
4 of the IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial 
statements, included within the Annual 
Report and Accounts 2020 (the “Annual 
Report”), which comprise: the group and 
company statements of financial position 
as at 31 July 2020; the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, 
the group and company cash flow 
statements, the consolidated statement 
of changes in equity and the company 
statement of changes in equity for the 
year then ended; and the notes to the 
financial statements, which include 
a description of the significant 
accounting policies.

Our opinion is consistent with our 
reporting to the Audit Committee.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance 
with International Standards on Auditing 
(UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further 
described in the Auditors’ responsibilities 
for the audit of the financial statements 
section of our report. We believe that 
the audit evidence we have obtained is 
sufficient and appropriate to provide 
a basis for our opinion.

Our audit approach

Overview

Materiality

Audit scope

Key audit 
matters

  Overall group materiality: £91,160 (2019: £116,000), based on 1% of total expenses pre exceptional costs.

  Overall company materiality: £81,127 (2019: £81,000), based on 1% of total assets capped at 89% of group materiality.

  Full scope audit of Nanoco Technologies Limited plus procedures over certain balances within three other 

Group companies.

  Going Concern and the Impact of Covid-19 (Group and Company).

  Recoverability of intangible assets (Group).

  Recoverability of investments (Company).

The scope of our audit

As part of designing our audit, we 
determined materiality and assessed the 
risks of material misstatement in the 
financial statements. 

Capability of the audit in detecting 
irregularities, including fraud

Based on our understanding of the 
group and industry, we identified that the 
principal risks of non-compliance with laws 
and regulations related to breaches of 
health and safety laws and infringement of 
intellectual property laws, and we considered 
the extent to which non-compliance might 

have a material effect on the financial 
statements. We also considered those laws 
and regulations that have a direct impact 
on the preparation of the financial 
statements such as the Companies Act 
2006 and tax legislation. We evaluated 
management’s incentives and opportunities 
for fraudulent manipulation of the financial 
statements (including the risk of override of 
controls), and determined that the principal 
risks were related to posting inappropriate 
journal entries to increase revenue or reduce 
expenditure, and management bias in 
accounting estimates. Audit procedures 
performed included:

  Discussions with management including 
consideration of known or suspected 
instances of non-compliance with 
laws and regulation and fraud;

  Understanding and evaluation of the 

operating effectiveness of management’s 
entity level controls designed to 
prevent and detect irregularities;

  Challenging assumptions and 

judgements made by management 
in their significant accounting 
estimates, in particular in relation 
to recoverability of intangible assets 
(see related key audit matter below);

080

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statementsReport on the audit of the 
financial statements continued

Our audit approach continued

Capability of the audit in detecting 
irregularities, including fraud continued

  Review of the compliance with VAT 

and PAYE requirements; and 

  Review of corporation tax disclosures 
in compliance with the accounting 
and legal requirements.

There are inherent limitations in the audit 
procedures described above and the 
further removed non-compliance with 

laws and regulations is from the events 
and transactions reflected in the 
financial statements, the less likely we 
would become aware of it. Also, the risk 
of not detecting a material misstatement 
due to fraud is higher than the risk of not 
detecting one resulting from error, as 
fraud may involve deliberate concealment 
by, for example, forgery or intentional 
misrepresentations, or through collusion.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, 
in the auditors’ professional judgement, 
were of most significance in the audit of 
the financial statements of the current 
period and include the most significant 

assessed risks of material misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) identified 
by the auditors, including those which 
had the greatest effect on: the overall 
audit strategy; the allocation of 
resources in the audit; and directing the 
efforts of the engagement team. These 
matters, and any comments we make 
on the results of our procedures thereon, 
were addressed in the context of our 
audit of the financial statements as 
a whole, and in forming our opinion 
thereon, and we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters. 
This is not a complete list of all risks 
identified by our audit. 

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Going Concern and the Impact of Covid-19 (Group and Company)

Refer to note 2(c) of the financial statements.

Going concern is a continual area of focus for the directors, 
given the current cash resources, the contracted revenue for 
FY21 and expected business activities. A share issue took place 
in July 2020 which raised additional cash of £3.2m (net of fees).

Management performed a base case and severe but plausible 
downside assessment, which showed a positive cash runway 
to at least the end of Dec 2022.

The ongoing and evolving Covid-19 pandemic, and the related 
government response to this crisis, has not had a significant 
impact on the performance of the group and company. The 
directors considered the potential impact to the group of the 
ongoing Covid-19 pandemic in the assessment of going 
concern and the carrying value of the group’s assets and 
disclosures included in the financial statements. 

In relation to the group’s going concern assessment, the 
directors have not included an explicit downside specifically 
due to Covid-19 given that the business does not have 
significant revenues and has not been severely impacted by 
Covid-19. In the severe but plausible downside scenario, there 
is no new revenue assumed past the current contracted 
revenue up to December 2020 and a course of cost cutting 
actions will be taken as a result.

Management concluded that the group and company expect 
to trade solvently under these scenarios for at least twelve 
months from the date of this report and cash flow forecasts 
support the group’s and company’s going concern status. The 
directors have therefore prepared the financial statements on 
a going concern basis.

Management concluded that there is no material impact 
on the financial statements from Covid-19, including in 
respect of the impairment of certain assets, or on provisions 
or estimates made.

We re-evaluated our risk assessment in particular in relation 
to the appropriateness of the going concern basis of 
preparation of the financial statements, and concluded 
it was a significant risk.

In assessing the models produced by management for their 
going concern assessment, and the potential impact of 
Covid-19, we undertook the following procedures:

  we obtained management’s assessment that supports the 

directors’ conclusions with respect to the disclosures provided 
around going concern;

  we discussed with management the assumptions applied 
in their going concern assessment so we could understand 
the rationale for those assumptions;

  we challenged the rationale for those assumptions, using 

our knowledge of the business and the sector; 

  we verified the current cash balances of the group;

  we verified the contracted revenue included in the models;

  we tested the mathematical accuracy of the models produced;

  we performed a sensitivity analysis to assess the impact 

of a reduction in cash inflows;

  we evaluated management’s downside case scenario 
and challenged the appropriateness of the underlying 
assumptions; and 

  we considered the potential impact of Covid-19 on other 
areas of the financial statements, specifically around 
impairment of the investment held by the company and 
concluded that there were no indicators of a material impact 
on amounts included in the company financial statements. 

The outcome of our assessment is shown in the Going Concern 
section below.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 081

Independent auditors’ report to the members of Nanoco Group plc continued

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued

Our audit approach continued

Key audit matters continued

Key audit matter

Recoverability of intangible assets (Group)

Refer to notes 2(e), 3(m) and 14 of the Financial Statements.

The intangible assets balance of £3,742k as at 31 July 2020 
was assessed for impairment during the year.

We focused on this area because the assessment of impairment 
indicators involved judgements that could have a material 
impact on the amounts recognised in the financial statements. 
The main judgement that is made by management is whether 
the patent still has a use in their current technologies or not.

The directors use available information to assess whether the fair 
value less costs of disposal of the group’s non-current assets, 
including intellectual property, is less than their carrying amount.

From this assessment it was established that £0.1m of patents 
were impaired as a result of no longer being of use to the business.

Recoverability of investments (Company)

Refer to notes 2, 3 and 15 of the Financial Statements.

As at 31 July 2020, the company had an investment in subsidiaries 
of £39,607k, which is required to be considered for indicators 
of impairment on an annual basis.

An indicator of impairment was not considered to exist at the 
balance sheet date. The Directors consider the fair value to 
be market value less costs to sell. As the market value was in 
excess of the book value, management did not propose any 
further impairment.

There is judgement involved in the determination of the 
recoverable amount of the investment.

How we tailored the audit scope

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

To evaluate management’s assessment of the recoverability 
of intangible assets, we performed the following:

  We assessed the reasonableness of management’s 

assumption regarding recoverable values.

  Regarding patents, we assessed whether management’s 
assessment of indicators of impairment was appropriate.

  We challenged management on their assessment 

of the potential sales value of their intangible assets 
when compared to transactions involving similar 
technology portfolios.

Based on our work, we did not identify any further 
impairments required.

To assess that there were no impairment indicators identified by 
the directors, we performed the following:

  We considered management’s conclusion that it was more 

appropriate to consider the fair value than value in use model.

  We tested the key inputs into management’s fair value 

calculation, including number of shares in issue and share price.

  We evaluated the disclosure in the financial statements to 

ensure it was complete and accurate.

Based on the work performed, we did not find any issues relating 
to the recoverability of the investments balance.

We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial 
statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls, 
and the industry in which they operate. This included a full scope audit of Nanoco Technologies Limited plus procedures over 
certain balances within three other group companies. All work was performed by the group engagement team.

Materiality

The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. 
These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent 
of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of 
misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Overall materiality

£91,160 (2019: £116,000).

£81,127 (2019: £81,000).

Group financial statements

Company financial statements

How we determined it

1% of total expenses pre exceptional costs.

1% of total assets capped at 89% of group 
materiality.

Rationale for 
benchmark applied

Total expenses pre exceptional costs 
represents a measure of the rate at which 
the group is using its cash resources, is 
considered to be more appropriate than a 
revenue or a profit based measure, and is a 
generally accepted auditing benchmark.

Total assets is considered to be appropriate as 
it is not a profit oriented Company. The Company 
holds investments in subsidiaries and therefore total 
assets is deemed a generally accepted auditing 
benchmark. Overall materiality has been capped 
to 89% of Group materiality.

082

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statementsReport on the audit of the 
financial statements continued

Our audit approach continued

Materiality continued

For each component in the scope of our 
group audit, we allocated a materiality 

that is less than our overall group 
materiality. The range of materiality 
allocated across components was 
£81,000 and £87,000.

(Company audit) (2019: £6,000) as well 
as misstatements below those amounts 
that, in our view, warranted reporting for 
qualitative reasons.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that 
we would report to them misstatements 
identified during our audit above £4,558 
(Group audit) (2019: £6,000) and £4,056 

Going concern

In accordance with ISAs (UK) we report 
as follows:

Reporting obligation

Outcome

We are required to report if we have anything material to 
add or draw attention to in respect of the directors’ statement 
in the financial statements about whether the directors 
considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis 
of accounting in preparing the financial statements and the 
directors’ identification of any material uncertainties to the 
group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern over a period of at least twelve months from the 
date of approval of the financial statements.

We are required to report if the directors’ statement relating 
to Going Concern in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is 
materially inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit.

We have nothing material to add or to draw attention to.
However, because not all future events or conditions can be 
predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the group’s 
and company’s ability to continue as a going concern. 

We have nothing to report.

Reporting on other information 

The other information comprises all of 
the information in the Annual Report 
other than the financial statements 
and our auditors’ report thereon. The 
directors are responsible for the other 
information. Our opinion on the financial 
statements does not cover the other 
information and, accordingly, we do not 
express an audit opinion or, except to the 
extent otherwise explicitly stated in this 
report, any form of assurance thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the 
financial statements, our responsibility 
is to read the other information and, in 
doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our 
knowledge obtained in the audit, or 
otherwise appears to be materially 
misstated. If we identify an apparent 
material inconsistency or material 
misstatement, we are required to perform 
procedures to conclude whether there is 
a material misstatement of the financial 
statements or a material misstatement 
of the other information. If, based on the 
work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of 
this other information, we are required 
to report that fact. We have nothing to 
report based on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report, we also considered 
whether the disclosures required by the 
UK Companies Act 2006 have been included. 

Based on the responsibilities described 
above and our work undertaken in the 
course of the audit, the Companies Act 
2006 (CA06), ISAs (UK) and the Listing Rules 
of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) 
require us also to report certain opinions 
and matters as described below (required 
by ISAs (UK) unless otherwise stated).

Strategic Report and Directors’ Report

In our opinion, based on the work 
undertaken in the course of the audit, the 
information given in the Strategic Report 
and Directors’ Report for the year 
ended 31 July 2020 is consistent with 
the financial statements and has been 
prepared in accordance with applicable 
legal requirements. (CA06)

In light of the knowledge and 
understanding of the group and 
company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, 
we did not identify any material 
misstatements in the Strategic Report 
and Directors’ Report. (CA06)

The directors’ assessment of the 
prospects of the group and of the 
principal risks that would threaten the 
solvency or liquidity of the group

We have nothing material to add or draw 
attention to regarding:

  The directors’ confirmation on page 79 
of the Annual Report that they have 
carried out a robust assessment of 
the principal risks facing the group, 
including those that would threaten 
its business model, future performance, 
solvency or liquidity.

  The disclosures in the Annual Report 
that describe those risks and explain 
how they are being managed or 
mitigated.

  The directors’ explanation on page 28 
of the Annual Report as to how they 
have assessed the prospects of the 
group, over what period they have 
done so and why they consider that 
period to be appropriate, and their 
statement as to whether they have a 
reasonable expectation that the 
group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as 
they fall due over the period of their 
assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any 
necessary qualifications or assumptions.

We have nothing to report having 
performed a review of the directors’ 
statement that they have carried out 
a robust assessment of the principal 
risks facing the group and statement 
in relation to the longer-term viability of 
the group. Our review was substantially 
less in scope than an audit and only 
consisted of making inquiries and 
considering the directors’ process 
supporting their statements; checking 
that the statements are in alignment 
with the relevant provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the 
“Code”); and considering whether the 
statements are consistent with the 
knowledge and understanding of 
the group and company and their 
environment obtained in the course 
of the audit. (Listing Rules)

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 083

Independent auditors’ report to the members of Nanoco Group plc continued

In preparing the financial statements, 
the directors are responsible for assessing 
the group’s and the company’s ability 
to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related 
to going concern and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless the 
directors either intend to liquidate the 
group or the company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of 
the financial statements

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the financial 
statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ 
report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance, but is not a guarantee that 
an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements 
can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in 
the aggregate, they could reasonably 
be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis 
of these financial statements. 

A further description of our 
responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements is located on the 
FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description 
forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report

This report, including the opinions, 
has been prepared for and only for 
the company’s members as a body in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 
of the Companies Act 2006 and for no 
other purpose. We do not, in giving these 
opinions, accept or assume responsibility 
for any other purpose or to any other 
person to whom this report is shown or 
into whose hands it may come save 
where expressly agreed by our prior 
consent in writing.

Other required reporting

Companies Act 2006 exception 
reporting

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are 
required to report to you if, in our opinion:

  we have not received all the 

information and explanations we 
require for our audit; or

  adequate accounting records have 
not been kept by the company, or 
returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not 
visited by us; or

  certain disclosures of directors’ 

remuneration specified by law are not 
made; or

  the company financial statements 

and the part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to be audited 
are not in agreement with the 
accounting records and returns. 

We have no exceptions to report arising 
from this responsibility. 

Appointment

Following the recommendation of the 
audit committee, we were appointed by 
the directors on 24 January 2019 to audit 
the financial statements for the year 
ended 31 July 2019 and subsequent 
financial periods. The period of total 
uninterrupted engagement is 2 years, 
covering the years ended 31 July 2019 
to 31 July 2020.

Jonathan Studholme 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and 
Statutory Auditors
Manchester
13 October 2020

Report on the audit of the 
financial statements 
continued

Reporting on other information 
continued

Other Code Provisions

We have nothing to report in respect 
of our responsibility to report when: 

  The statement given by the directors, 
on page 79, that they consider the 
Annual Report taken as a whole to be 
fair, balanced and understandable, 
and provides the information 
necessary for the members to assess 
the group’s and company’s position 
and performance, business model 
and strategy is materially inconsistent 
with our knowledge of the group and 
company obtained in the course of 
performing our audit.

  The section of the Annual Report 
on page 52 and 53 describing the 
work of the Audit Committee does 
not appropriately address matters 
communicated by us to the 
Audit Committee.

  The directors’ statement relating to 
the company’s compliance with the 
Code does not properly disclose a 
departure from a relevant provision of 
the Code specified, under the Listing 
Rules, for review by the auditors.

Directors’ Remuneration

In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to be audited has 
been properly prepared in accordance 
with the Companies Act 2006. (CA06)

Responsibilities for the financial 
statements and the audit

Responsibilities of the directors for the 
financial statements

As explained more fully in the Statement 
of Directors’ Responsibilities, the directors 
are responsible for the preparation of the 
financial statements in accordance with 
the applicable framework and for being 
satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view. The directors are also responsible 
for such internal control as they 
determine is necessary to enable the 
preparation of financial statements that 
are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error.

084

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statementsConsolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 July 2020

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Other operating income

Operating expenses

Research and development expenses

Administrative expenses

Operating loss

- before exceptional items and share-based payments

- share-based payments

- net exceptional costs

Finance income

Finance expense

Loss before taxation

Taxation

Loss after taxation

Other comprehensive income/(loss)

Gain on exchange rate translations

Total comprehensive loss for the year

Loss per share

Basic and diluted loss for the year

Notes

4

5

2020
£’000

3,856

(345)

3,511

101

2019
£’000

7,123

(665)

6,458

204

(3,143)

(6,350)

(4,385)

(7,760)

6

(5,881)

(5,483)

(4,783)

(4,985)

25

7

9

9

10

(376)

(722)

8

(87)

(232)

(266)

12

(38)

(5,960)

(5,509)

893

1,151

(5,067)

(4,358)

3

14

(5,064)

(4,344)

11

(1.76)p

(1.52)p

The loss for the current and preceding year arises from the Group’s continuing operations and is attributable to the equity 
holders of the Parent.

The basic and diluted loss per share are the same as the effect of share options is anti-dilutive.

The notes on pages 89 to 115 form an integral part of these financial statements.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 085

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 July 2020

Group

At 1 August 2018

Loss for the year 

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive loss

Issue of share capital on exercise of options

Share-based payments

At 31 July 2019

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive loss

Issue of share capital on placing

Share-based payments

At 31 July 2020

Issued
equity
capital
£’000

Reverse
acquisition
reserve
£'000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£’000

Merger
reserve
£’000

Accumulated
losses
£’000

Total
£’000

144,426

(77,868)

3,214

(1,242)

(55,895)

12,635

—

—

—

27

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(27)

232

—

—

—

—

—

(4,358)

(4,358)

14

14

(4,344)

(4,344)

—

—

—

232

144,453

(77,868)

3,419

(1,242)

(60,239)

8,523

—

—

—

3,409

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

376

—

—

—

—

—

(5,067)

(5,067)

3

3

(5,064)

(5,064)

—

—

3,409

376

147,862

(77,868)

3,795

(1,242)

(65,303)

7,244

Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 July 2020

Company

At 1 August 2018

Loss for the year and total comprehensive loss for the year

Issue of share capital on exercise of options

Share-based payments

At 31 July 2019

Loss for the year and total comprehensive loss for the year

Issue of share capital on placing

Share-based payments

At 31 July 2020

Issued
equity
capital
£’000

Share-based
payment
reserve
£’000

Capital
redemption
reserve
£’000

Accumulated
losses
£’000

Total
£’000

144,426

3,214

4,402

(75,120)

76,922

—

27

—

—

(27)

232

—

—

—

(38,278)

(38,278)

—

—

—

232

144,453

3,419

4,402

(113,398)

38,876

—

3,409

—

—

—

376

—

—

—

(64)

—

—

(64)

3,409

376

147,862

3,795

4,402

(113,462)

42,597

086

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statementsGroup and Company statements of financial position
at 31 July 2020

Assets

Non-current assets

Tangible fixed assets

Right of use assets

Intangible assets

Investment in subsidiaries

Current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Income tax asset

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Lease liabilities

Provisions

Deferred revenue

Non-current liabilities

Financial liabilities

Lease liabilities

Deferred revenue

Total liabilities

Net assets

Capital and reserves

Share capital

Share premium

Reverse acquisition reserve

Share-based payment reserve

Merger reserve

Capital redemption reserve

Accumulated losses

Total equity

Registered no. 05067291

31 July
2020
Group
£’000

31 July
2020
Company
£’000

31 July
2019
Group
£’000

31 July
2019
Company
£’000

Notes

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

23

20

22

21

23

22

24

24

24

25

26

26

27

263

612

3,742

— 

—

—

747

—

3,897

—

—

—

—

39,607

—

39,229

4,617

39,607

4,644

39,229

140

1,018

910

5,170

7,238

—

—

—

3,440

3,440

11,855

43,047

(2,113)

(642)

—

(603)

(3,358)

(462)

(542)

(249)

(1,253)

(4,611)

—

—

—

—

—

(450)

—

—

(450)

(450)

226

1,117

1,129

7,005

9,477

14,121

(2,553)

—

(797)

(1,462)

(4,812)

(433)

—

(353)

(786)

(5,598)

—

—

—

97

97

39,326

—

—

—

—

—

(450)

—

—

(450)

(450)

7,244

42,597

8,523

38,876

30,570

30,570

117,292

117,292

28,622

115,831

(77,868)

3,795

(1,242)

—

(77,868)

3,795

— 

3,419

(1,242)

28,622

115,831

—

3,419

—

—

4,402

—

4,402

(65,303)

(113,462)

(60,239)

(113,398)

7,244

42,597

8,523

38,876

The Parent Company’s result for the period ended 31 July 2020 was a loss of £64,000 (2019: loss of £38,278,000). There was 
no other comprehensive income in either the current or prior year.

The notes on pages 89 to 115 form an integral part of these financial statements.

The financial statements on pages 85 to 88 were approved by the Board of Directors on 13 October and signed on its behalf by:

Dr Christopher Richards 
Chairman   
13 October 2020 

Brian Tenner
Director
13 October 2020

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 087

Group and Company cash flow statements
for the year ended 31 July 2020

Loss before tax

Adjustments for:

Net finance expense

(Profit)/Loss on exchange rate translations

Depreciation of tangible fixed assets

Depreciation of right of use assets

Amortisation of intangible assets

Impairment of intangible assets

Impairment of Company investment

Impairment of inter-company receivable

Share-based payments

Exceptional items

Changes in working capital:

Decrease/(increase) in inventories

Decrease in trade and other receivables

Decrease in trade and other payables

(Decrease)/increase in provisions

(Decrease)/increase in deferred revenue

Cash outflow from operating activities

Research and development tax credit received

Overseas corporation tax paid

Net cash outflow from operating activities

Cash flow from investing activities

Purchases of tangible fixed assets

Purchases of intangible fixed assets

Inter-company receipt

Interest received

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities

Cash flow from financing activities

Proceeds from placing of ordinary share capital

Costs of placing

Payment of lease liabilities

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the start of the year

31 July
2020
Group
£’000

31 July
2020
Company
£’000

31 July
2019
Group
£’000

31 July
2019
Company
£’000

Notes

(5,960)

(64)

(5,509)

(38,278)

9

12

13

14

14

15

17

25

7

12

14

(79)

(87)

590

505

633

120

—

—

376

722

221

99

(30)

(797)

(963)

(4,650)

1,111

—

(3,539)

(106)

(598)

—

8

(696)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

64

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3,409

3,409

(26)

14

613

—

552

26

—

—

232

266

(9)

298

(1,515)

797

2,226

(2,035)

1,423

—

(612)

(2,081)

(1,043)

—

12

(3,112)

—

—

—

—

(3,724)

10,729

—

—

—

—

—

—

24,006

14,272

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

54

—

54

—

—

—

—

54

43

97

(64)

—

3,343

3,343

97

(237)

(772)

2,400

(1,835)

7,005

5,170

3,440

7,005

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

18

The notes on pages 89 to 115 form an integral part of these financial statements.

088

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statementsNotes to the financial statements

1. Reporting entity

Nanoco Group plc (the “Company”), a public company limited by shares, is on the premium list of the London Stock Exchange. 
The Company is incorporated and domiciled in England, UK. The registered number is 05067291 and the address of its registered 
office is 46 Grafton Street, Manchester M13 9NT. The Company is registered in England.

These Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the “Group” 
and individually as “Group entities”) for the year ended 31 July 2020.

The financial statements of Nanoco Group plc and its subsidiaries (the “Group”) for the year ended 31 July 2020 were authorised 
for issue by the Board of Directors on 13 October 2020 and the statements of financial position were signed on the Board’s behalf 
by Dr Christopher Richards and Brian Tenner.

The Company has elected to take the exemption under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present the Parent Company’s 
income statement. 

The significant accounting policies adopted by the Group are set out in note 3.

2. Basis of preparation

(a) Statement of compliance

The Group’s and Parent Company’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 as 
applicable to companies using International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (“IFRS”) and IFRS 
Interpretations Committee (“IFRS IC”) interpretations as they apply to the financial statements of the Group for the year ended 
31 July 2020.

(b) Basis of measurement 

The Parent Company and Group financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis. 

(c) Going concern 

All of the following matters are taken into account by the Directors in forming their assessment of going concern. The Group’s 
business activities and market conditions are set out on pages 16 to 19. The principal risks and uncertainties are shown on 
pages 25 to 27 while the Group’s financial position is described in the Financial review on pages 22 to 24. Furthermore, note 28 
summarises the Group’s financial risk management objectives, policies and processes. The Group funds its day-to-day cash 
requirements from existing cash reserves (as is common with businesses at a similar stage of development, the Group does 
not currently have access to any debt facilities).

For the purposes of their going concern assessment and the basis for the preparation of the 2020 Annual Report, the Directors 
have reviewed the same trading and cash flow forecasts and sensitivity analyses that were used by the Group in the viability 
assessment noted earlier in this report. The same base case and downside sensitivities were also used. The base case represents 
the Board’s current expectations, and builds on the fundraise of £3.2 million (net of costs) completed in July 2020. The key 
assumptions underpinning the base case are:

  new commercial contracts are entered into based on existing pipeline of opportunities;

  the Groups’ variable costs remain in line with manufacturing activities; and

  the overhead cost base benefits from the restructuring exercise in September 2020.

The base case produces a cash flow forecast that demonstrates that the Group has cash resources to December 2022. 

However, the Board acknowledges that the base case includes an element of risk that some or all of these non-contracted 
projects may not convert to sales during the forecast period. Accordingly, the Board has considered the downside scenario 
in which no revenue, except that already contracted or under contractual negotiation, was achieved during the period. In this 
scenario, management has identified a series of mitigating actions, including cost savings and a reorganisation of its operations, 
that could be undertaken in the event additional sales contracts do not materialise. These actions would be adequate to 
preserve funding for the two years of the viability assessment and the twelve months of the going concern assessment.

Covid-19 may have an impact on our business - the full impact on the Group will depend on the duration of the crisis, and how 
it affects the economy. The Group currently has plans in place to mitigate the risk to the operational business. However, there is 
a continued risk that revenue opportunities reduce due to the wider economic impact. We will continue to evaluate the potential 
impacts as the situation develops further.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has access to adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the consolidated 
financial statements. The financial statements do not reflect any adjustments that would be required to be made if they were 
prepared on a basis other than the going concern basis.

(d) Functional and presentational currency 

These financial statements are presented in Pounds Sterling, which is the presentational currency of the Group and the functional 
currency of the Company. All financial information presented has been rounded to the nearest thousand.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 089

Notes to the financial statements continued

2. Basis of preparation continued

(e) Use of estimates and judgements 

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and judgements that affect the amounts 
reported for assets and liabilities as at the reporting date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during the year. 
The nature of estimation means that actual amounts could differ from those estimates. Estimates and judgements used in the 
preparation of the financial statements are continually reviewed and revised as necessary. While every effort is made to ensure 
that such estimates and judgements are reasonable, by their nature they are uncertain and, as such, changes in estimates and 
judgements may have a material impact on the financial statements.

In the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies, management has made the following estimates and judgements, 
which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the consolidated financial statements.

Estimates

Equity-settled share-based payments

The Group has historically issued LTIPs to incentivise employees. The determination of share-based payment costs requires: the 
selection of an appropriate valuation method; consideration as to the inputs necessary for the valuation model chosen; and 
judgement regarding when and if performance conditions will be met. Inputs required for this arise from judgements relating to 
the future volatility of the share price of Nanoco and comparable companies, the Company’s expected dividend yields, risk-free 
interest rates and expected lives of the options. The Directors draw on a variety of sources to aid in the determination of the 
appropriate data to use in such calculations. The share-based payment expense is most sensitive to vesting assumptions and 
to the future volatility of the future share price factor. Further information is included in note 3.

Impairment of intellectual property and tangible fixed assets

As the Group has not, to date, made a profit the carrying value of these assets may need to be impaired. Impairment exists where 
the carrying value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount, which is the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and its 
value in use. The value in use calculation uses cash flows based on budgets that have been approved by the Directors. The Directors 
also use available information to assess whether the fair value less costs of disposal of the Group’s non-current assets, including 
intellectual property, is less than their carrying amount. Furthermore, during the year another extensive review was undertaken to 
identify which patents are of no further value to Nanoco and should be allowed to lapse. As a consequence, patents with a value 
of £0.1 million (2019: £26,000) have been fully impaired in these financial statements. Judgements are based on the information 
available at each reporting date, which includes the progress with testing and certification and progress on, for example, establishment 
of commercial arrangements with third parties. The Group does not believe that any of its patents in isolation are material to the 
business. Management has adopted the prudent approach of amortising patent registration costs over a ten-year period, which 
is substantially shorter than the life of the patent. For external patents acquired the same rule is adopted unless the remaining life 
of the patent is shorter, in which event the cost of acquisition is amortised over the remaining life of the patent. 

Impairment of investment and inter-company receivable

Judgement is required to assess the carrying value of the Company investment and inter-company receivable at each reporting date.

Accounting standards (IAS 36 Impairment of Assets) require investments in subsidiary undertakings (equity and loans) to be 
carried at the lower of cost or recoverable value. Recoverable value is defined as the higher of fair value less costs of disposal 
(effectively net sale proceeds) and value in use. Indicators of potential impairment noted in IAS 36 (para 12) include, but are not 
limited to, situations where the carrying amount of the net assets of the entity is more than its market value and where significant 
changes with an adverse effect on the entity have taken place during the period.

The Directors consider the fair value to be market value less costs to sell. As the market value was in excess of the book value, 
no further impairment is proposed.

Judgements

Revenue recognition

Judgement is required in reviewing the terms of development agreements to identify separate components of revenue, if any, 
that are consistent with the economic substance of the agreement and in turn the period over which development revenue 
should be recognised. Judgements are required to assess the stage of completion including, as appropriate, whether and when 
contractual milestones have been achieved. Management judgements are similarly required to determine whether services or 
rights under licence agreements have been delivered so as to enable licence revenue to be recognised. This matter is further 
complicated where a contract may have different elements which may result in separate recognition treatments under IFRS 15. 
Further information is included in note 3(d).

Research and development

Careful judgement by the Directors is applied when deciding whether the recognition requirements for development costs 
have been met. This is necessary as the economic success of any product development is uncertain until such time as 
technical viability has been proven and commercial supply agreements are likely to be achieved. Judgements are based on 
the information available at each reporting date which includes the progress with testing and certification and progress on, 
for example, establishment of commercial arrangements with third parties. In addition, all internal activities related to research 
and development of new products are continuously monitored by the Directors. Further information is included in note 3.

090

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements2. Basis of preparation continued

(e) Use of estimates and judgements continued

Judgements continued

Outlook

The key assumptions concerning the future and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the reporting date, which have 
a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year, 
are those relating to the estimation of the number of share options that will ultimately vest (note 23). The Group based its 
assumptions and estimates on parameters available when the consolidated financial statements were prepared. Existing 
circumstances and assumptions about future developments, however, may change due to market changes or circumstances 
arising that are beyond the control of the Group. Such changes are reflected in the assumptions when they occur.

3. Significant accounting policies

The accounting policies set out below are consistent with those of the previous financial year and are applied consistently 
by Group entities.

(a) Basis of consolidation

The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of Nanoco Group plc and the entities it controls 
(its subsidiaries) drawn up to 31 July each year.

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has the power over the investee (i.e. existing rights that give it the current ability 
to direct the relevant activities of the investee), exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee and 
ability to use its power over the investee to affect its returns. All of Nanoco Group plc’s subsidiaries are 100% owned. Subsidiaries 
are fully consolidated from the date control passes.

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. The costs of an 
acquisition are measured as the fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the 
date of exchange, plus costs directly attributable to the acquisition. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent 
liabilities assumed in a business combination are initially measured at fair value at acquisition date irrespective of the extent of 
any minority interest. The difference between the cost of acquisition of shares in subsidiaries and the fair value of the identifiable 
net assets acquired is capitalised as goodwill and reviewed annually for impairment. Any deficiency in the cost of acquisition 
below the fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (i.e. discount on acquisition) is recognised directly in the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income.

In the consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of the foreign operations are translated into Sterling at the 
exchange rate prevailing at the reporting date. Income and cash flow statement items for Group entities with a functional 
currency other than Sterling are translated into Sterling at monthly average exchange rates, which approximate to the actual 
rates, for the relevant accounting periods. The exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in other comprehensive 
income. See note 3(b).

All intra-group transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies are eliminated on 
consolidation. Subsidiaries’ accounting policies are amended where necessary to ensure consistency with the policies adopted 
by the Group.

(b) Foreign currency transactions

Transactions in foreign currencies are initially recorded in the functional currency by applying the spot rate ruling at the date of 
the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies (including those of the Group’s US subsidiary) 
are retranslated at the functional currency rate of exchange ruling at the reporting date. All differences are taken to the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rates 
as at the dates of the initial transactions. Non-monetary items measured at fair value in a foreign currency are translated using 
the exchange rates at the date when the fair value was determined.

(c) Segmental reporting

An operating segment is a component of an entity that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses, whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to make decisions about 
resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and for which discrete financial information is available. 
As at the reporting date the Company operated with only a single segment, being the research, development and manufacture 
of products and services based on high performance nanoparticles.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 091

Notes to the financial statements continued

3. Significant accounting policies continued

(d) Revenue recognition

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that economic benefits will flow to the Group and the revenue can be 
reliably measured. Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the sale of goods or 
services, excluding discounts, rebates, VAT and other sales taxes or duties.

The Group’s revenues to date comprise amounts earned under joint development agreements, individual project development 
programmes and material supply and licence agreements and revenue from the sale of quantum dot products.

Revenues received in advance of work performed from development programmes are recognised on a straight-line basis over 
the period that the development work is being performed as measured by contractual milestones. Revenue is not recognised 
where there is uncertainty regarding the achievement of such milestones and where the customer has the right to recoup 
advance payments.

Contractual payments received from licence agreements are recognised as revenue when goods, services or rights and 
entitlements are supplied. Upfront licence fees, where control over the intellectual property has been retained by the Group, 
are taken to income on a straight-line basis over the initial period of the contract in accordance with the continuing obligations 
under the contract.

Revenue from the sale of products is recognised at the point of transfer of risks and rewards of ownership, which is generally 
on shipment of product.

IFRS 15 requires the identification of deliverables in contracts with customers that qualify as performance obligations. For any 
contracts in the year, we have used the five-step process identified by IFRS 15 and applied this.

(e) Government grants

Government grants are recognised when it is reasonable to expect that the grants will be received and that all related 
conditions are met, usually on submission of a valid claim for payment.

Government grants of a revenue nature are recognised as other operating income in the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income.

Government grants relating to capital expenditure are deducted in arriving at the carrying amount of the asset.

(f) Cost of sales

Cost of sales comprises the labour, materials and power costs incurred in the generation of revenue from products sold and the 
rendering of services.

Revenue from royalties and licences, which comprise payments from customers to gain preferential treatment in terms of supply 
or pricing, does not have an associated cost of sale.

(g) Operating loss

Operating losses are stated after research and development and administration expenses but before finance charges and taxation.

(h) Research and development

Research costs are charged in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income as they are incurred. Development costs 
will be capitalised as intangible assets when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group. Such intangible 
assets will be amortised on a straight-line basis from the point at which the assets are ready for use over the period of the 
expected benefit, and will be reviewed for impairment at each reporting date based on the circumstances at the reporting date.

The criteria for recognising expenditure as an asset are:

  it is technically feasible to complete the product;

  management intends to complete the product and use or sell it;

  there is an ability to use or sell the product;

  it can be demonstrated how the product will generate probable future economic benefits;

  adequate technical, financial and other resources are available to complete the development, use and sale of the product; and

  expenditure attributable to the product can be reliably measured.

Development costs are currently charged against income as incurred since the criteria for their recognition as an asset are not 
met, the exception being the costs of filing and maintenance of intellectual property as these are considered to generate 
probable future economic benefits and are capitalised as intangible assets (see note 13).

092

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements3. Significant accounting policies continued

(i) Finance income and expense

Finance income comprises interest income on funds invested and changes in the fair value of financial assets at fair value 
through the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. Interest income is recognised as interest accrues using the 
effective interest rate method.

Finance expense comprises interest expense on borrowings. All borrowing costs are recognised using the effective interest method.

(j) Income tax

Income tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax expense is recognised in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity or in other comprehensive income.

Current income tax assets (including research and development income tax credit) and liabilities for the current and prior periods 
are measured at the amount expected to be recovered from, or paid to, the tax authorities. The tax rates and tax laws used to 
compute the amount are those that are enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date.

Deferred income tax is recognised on all temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their 
carrying amounts in the financial statements with the following exceptions:

  where the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or of an asset or liability in a transaction that 
is not a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss; and

  in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries where the timing of the reversal 
of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured on an undiscounted basis using the tax rates and tax laws that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and which are expected to apply when the related deferred 
tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.

Deferred income tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against 
which differences can be utilised. An asset is not recognised to the extent that the transfer of economic benefits in the future 
is uncertain.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are offset only if a legally enforceable right exists to set off current tax assets against 
current tax liabilities, the deferred income taxes relate to the same taxation authority and that authority permits the Group to 
make a single payment.

(k) Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment assets are recognised initially at cost. After initial recognition, these assets are carried at cost less 
any accumulated depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses. Cost comprises the aggregate amount paid and the 
fair value of any other consideration given to acquire the asset and includes costs directly attributable to making the asset 
capable of operating as intended.

Depreciation is computed by allocating the depreciable amount of an asset on a systematic basis over its useful life 
and is applied separately to each identifiable component.

The following bases and rates are used to depreciate classes of assets:

Laboratory infrastructure  –  straight line over remainder of lease period (two to ten years)

Fixtures and fittings 

–  straight line over five years

Office equipment 

–  straight line over three years

Plant and machinery 

–  straight line over five years

The carrying values of tangible fixed assets are reviewed for impairment if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the 
carrying value may not be recoverable, and are written down immediately to their recoverable amount. Useful lives and residual 
values are reviewed annually and where adjustments are required these are made prospectively.

A tangible fixed asset item is derecognised on disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the 
continued use of the asset. Any gain or loss arising on the derecognition of the asset is included in the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income in the period of derecognition.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 093

Notes to the financial statements continued

3. Significant accounting policies continued

(k) Property, plant and equipment continued

Assets under construction, which principally relate to leasehold improvements and plant and machinery, are not depreciated until 
such time as they are available for use. If there are indications of impairment in the carrying value, then the recoverable amount 
is estimated and compared to the carrying amount. The recoverable amount is determined as the value that will ultimately be 
capitalised as an asset, based upon IAS 16 recognition and capitalisation criteria.

(l) Intangible assets

Intangible assets acquired either as part of a business combination or from contractual or other legal rights are recognised 
separately from goodwill provided they are separable and their fair value can be measured reliably. This includes the costs 
associated with acquiring and registering patents in respect of intellectual property rights.

Where consideration for the purchase of an intangible asset includes contingent consideration, the fair value of the contingent 
consideration is included in the cost of the asset.

Where intangible assets recognised have finite lives, after initial recognition their carrying value is amortised on a straight-line 
basis over those lives. The nature of those intangibles recognised and their estimated useful lives are as follows:

Patents 

–   straight line over ten years

(m) Impairment of assets

At each reporting date the Group reviews the carrying value of its plant, equipment and intangible assets to determine whether 
there is an indication that these assets have suffered an impairment loss. If any such indication exists, or when annual impairment 
testing for an asset is required, the Company makes an assessment of the asset’s recoverable amount.

An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s or cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in 
use and is determined for an individual asset, unless the asset does not generate cash inflows that are largely independent of 
those from other assets or groups of assets. Where the carrying value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount, the asset is 
considered impaired and is written down to its recoverable amount. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows 
are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value 
of money and the risks specific to the asset. In determining fair value less costs of disposal, an appropriate valuation model is 
used and these calculations are corroborated by valuation multiples or other available fair value indicators. Impairment losses 
on continuing operations are recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income in those expense categories 
consistent with the function of the impaired asset.

An assessment is made at each reporting date as to whether there is any indication that previously recognised impairment 
losses may no longer exist or may have decreased. If such indication exists, the recoverable amount is estimated. A previously 
recognised impairment loss is reversed only if there has been a change in the assumptions used to determine the asset’s 
recoverable amount since the last impairment loss was recognised. If that is the case the carrying amount of the asset is 
increased to its recoverable amount. That increased amount cannot exceed the carrying amount that would have been 
determined, net of depreciation, had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior years. Such reversal is recognised 
in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income unless the asset is carried at a revalued amount, in which case the 
reversal is treated as a valuation increase. After such a reversal the depreciation charge is adjusted in future periods to allocate 
the asset’s revised carrying amount, less any residual value, on a systematic basis over its remaining useful life.

Impairment charges have been posted during the year in relation to intangible assets. See the relevant note for more information.       

(n) Investments in subsidiaries

Investments in subsidiaries are stated in the Company statement of financial position at cost less provision for any impairment.

(o) Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost based on latest contractual prices includes all costs 
incurred in bringing each product to its present location and condition. Net realisable value is based on estimated selling price 
less any further costs expected to be incurred to disposal. Provision is made for slow-moving or obsolete items.

094

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements3. Significant accounting policies continued

(p) Financial instruments

Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised when the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the 
relevant instrument and derecognised when it ceases to be party to such provisions. Such assets and liabilities are classified as 
current if they are expected to be realised or settled within twelve months after the balance sheet date. Financial assets and 
liabilities are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently measured at either fair value or amortised cost including directly 
attributable transaction costs.

The Group has the following categories of financial assets and liabilities:

Receivables

(i) Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables, which generally have 30 to 60-day terms, are recognised and carried at the lower of their original invoiced 
value and recoverable amount. The time value of money is not material.

Provision is made when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to recover balances in full. Significant financial 
difficulties faced by the customer, probability that the customer will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation and default in 
payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired. The amount of the provision is the difference between 
the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest 
rate. The carrying value of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is 
recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income within administrative expenses.

When a trade receivable is uncollectable, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables.

(ii) Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at hand and deposits with maturities of three months or less. Short-term investments 
comprise deposits with maturities of more than three months, but no greater than twelve months.

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

(i) Trade and other payables

Trade and other payables are non-interest bearing and are initially recognised at fair value. They are subsequently measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.

(ii) Loans and convertible loan notes

Obligations for loans and borrowings are measured initially at fair value and subsequently interest-bearing loans are measured 
at fair value. Convertible loan notes are presented as financial liabilities as rights of the note holder to convert the loan notes 
into equity are within the control of the Company.

(q) Share capital

Proceeds on issue of shares are included in shareholders’ equity, net of transaction costs. The carrying amount is not remeasured 
in subsequent years.

(r) Share-based payments

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions are measured with reference to the fair value at the date of grant, recognised 
on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the Company’s estimate of shares that will eventually vest. Fair value is 
measured using a suitable option pricing model.

At each reporting date before vesting, the cumulative expense is calculated, representing the extent to which the vesting period 
has expired and management’s best estimate of the achievement or otherwise of non-market conditions and the number of 
equity instruments that will ultimately vest. The movement in cumulative expense since the previous reporting date is recognised 
in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, with a corresponding entry in equity.

Where the terms of an equity-settled award are modified or a new award is designated as replacing a cancelled or settled 
award, the cost based on the original award terms continues to be recognised over the original vesting period. In addition, an 
expense is recognised over the remainder of the new vesting period for the incremental fair value of any modification, based on 
the difference between the fair value of the original award and the fair value of the modified award, both as measured on the 
date of the modification. No reduction is recognised if this difference is negative.

Where awards are granted to the employees of the subsidiary company, the fair value of the awards at grant date is recorded 
in the Company’s financial statements as an increase in the value of the investment with a corresponding increase in equity 
via the share-based payment reserve.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 095

Notes to the financial statements continued

3. Significant accounting policies continued

(s) Defined contribution pension scheme

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the 
Company in an independently administered fund. The amounts charged against profits represent the contributions payable 
to the scheme in respect of the accounting period.

(t) Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is 
probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable 
estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. Provision is not made for future operating losses. Provisions are 
discounted where the impact is deemed to be material.

(u) Exceptional items

Items of income and expenditure which are material and non-recurring are presented separately in the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income. The separate reporting of exceptional items helps to provide an indication of the underlying 
performance of the Group and hence allows the user of the accounts a fuller understanding of that performance.

(v) New accounting standards and interpretations

The following amendments to IFRSs became mandatory in this reporting period. The Group has applied the following standards 
and amendments for the first time for the reporting period commencing 1 August 2019:

  IFRS 16 Leases

IFRS 16 sets out the principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases for both the lessee and 
the lessor. It eliminates the lease clarification of leases as either operating leases or financial leases and introduces a single lease 
accounting model requiring lessees to recognise a lease liability reflecting the future lease payments and a right of use asset 
for lease contracts.

The Group has applied the modified retrospective transition approach, with recognition of transitional adjustments on the date 
of initial application (1 August 2019), without restatement of comparative figures.

On transition to IFRS 16, the Group elected to apply the following practical expedients on a lease by lease basis as allowed 
by the standard:

  to apply a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics;

  to rely upon previous assessments of onerous leases; and

  apply the short-term and low value exemptions.

All of these leases relate to property. None of these are sub-let. Lease payments for low value or short-term leases where the 
Group has elected not to recognise a right of use asset and lease liability are charged as an expense on a straight-line basis.

At the date of commencement of property leases the Group determines the lease term to be the full term of the lease, assuming 
that any option to break or extend is not likely to be exercised. Leases are regularly reviewed and will be revalued if it becomes 
likely that a break clause or option to extend will be exercised. The weighted average incremental borrowing rate applied at the 
date of transition was 3.75%.

The Group recognises a right of use asset at the lease commencement date. The right of use asset is measured at its carrying 
amount as if IFRS 16 has been applied since the commencement date, discounted using the lessee’s incremental rate at the date 
of initial application. Subsequent to measurement, right of use assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over the remaining 
term of the lease or over the remaining economic life of the asset if assessed to be shorter.

The lease liabilities are measured at the present value of the remaining lease payments, discounted using the Group’s 
incremental borrowing rate as at 1 August 2019. The Group’s incremental borrowing rate is the rate at which a similar borrowing 
could be obtained over a similar term in a similar economic environment. Judgement is required to determine an approximation 
with consideration given to the Bank of England base rates adjusted by an indicative credit premium and lease specific 
adjustment. Subsequently, the lease liability is increased by the interest cost on the lease liability and decreased by the lease 
payments made. It is remeasured if there is a modification, a change in lease term or a change in the fixed lease payment.

The impact on the balance sheet on transition is summarised below:

As at 31 July 2019

Right of use assets (leased property)

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

Onerous lease liabilities

096

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

As at
31 July 2019
£’000

IFRS 16
adjustment
£’000

As at
1 August 2019
£’000

—

—

(2,553)

(663)

981

(1,769)

125

663

981

(1,769)

(2,428)

—

Financial statements3. Significant accounting policies continued

(v) New accounting standards and interpretations continued

During the year, the movements on the right of use assets and lease liabilities are as follows:

Right of use assets

Opening net book value at 1 August 2019

Additions

Depreciation

Closing net book value at 31 July 2020

Lease liabilities

Opening liabilities at 1 August 2019

Additions

Lease payments

Interest charge

Closing net book value at 31 July 2020

£’000

981

136

(505)

612

£’000

(1,769)

(136)

772

(51)

(1,184)

The reconciliation of operating lease commitments disclosed at 31 July 2019 to lease liabilities recognised at 1 August 2019 is as follows:

Operating lease commitments disclosed as at 31 July 2019

Short-term and low value leases recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis

Effect of discounting under the Group’s incremental borrowing rate

Total lease liabilities recognised at 1 August 2019

If the prior year the income statement was presented under IFRS 16, Adjusted LBITDA would be presented as follows:

Adjusted LBITDA as presented

Reclassification of operating lease costs as depreciation

Revised LBITDA

The following standards have been issued but have not been applied by the Group in these financial statements. 
These amendments to standards and interpretations had no significant impact on the financial statements:

£’000

1,954 

(14)

(171)

1,769

2019
£ million

(3.8)

0.7

(3.1)

  IFRIC 23 “Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments”

  Amendments to IFRS 4 “Insurance Contracts”

  Amendments to IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments”

  Amendments to IAS 28 “Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures”

  Amendments to IAS 19 “Plan Amendment, Curtailment or Settlement”

The following standards and amendments to standards have been issued but are not effective for the financial year beginning 
1 August 2019 and have not been early adopted:

  Amendments to IFRS 3 “Definition of a Business”

  Amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 8 “Definition of Material”

  IFRS 17 “Insurance Contracts”

  Amendment to IAS 1 “Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-Current”

  Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39 and IFRS 17 “Interest Rate Benchmark Reform”

  Various standards Amendments to References to the Conceptual Framework in IFRS Standards

The amendments to standards and interpretations noted above are expected to have no significant impact on the 
financial statements.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 097

Notes to the financial statements continued

4. Segmental information

Operating segments

At 31 July 2020 and 2019 the Group operated as one segment, being the research, development and manufacture of products 
and services based on high performance nanoparticles. This is the level at which operating results are reviewed by the chief 
operating decision maker (i.e. the Board) to make decisions about resources, and for which financial information is available. 
All revenues have been generated from continuing operations and are from external customers.

Analysis of revenue

Products sold

Rendering of services

Royalties and licences

31 July
2020
£’000

448

2,981

427

3,856

31 July
2019
£’000

186

6,488

449

7,123

There was a material customer who generated revenue of £2,475,000 (2019: one material customer amounting to £6,461,000).

The Group operates in four main geographic areas, although all are managed in the UK. The Group’s revenue per geographical 
segment based on the customer’s location is as follows:

Revenue

UK

Europe (excluding UK)

Asia

USA

31 July
2020
£’000

17

1,111

228

2,500

3,856

31 July
2019
£’000

1

485

141

6,496

7,123

All the Group’s assets are held in the UK and all of its capital expenditure arises in the UK. The loss before taxation and 
attributable to the single segment was £5,960,000 (2019: £5,509,000).

5. Other operating income

Government grants

6. Operating loss

Operating loss is stated after charging:

Depreciation of tangible fixed assets (see note 12)

Depreciation of right of use assets

Amortisation of intangible assets (see note 13)

Impairment of tangible fixed assets (see note 12)

Impairment of intangible assets (see note 13)

Staff costs (see note 8)

Foreign exchange losses

Research and development expense1

Share-based payments

31 July
2020
£’000

101

31 July
2019
£’000

204

31 July
2020
£’000

590

505

633

—

120

4,164

80

3,143

376

31 July
2019
£’000

613

—

552

3,325

26

5,596

63

4,385

232

1 

Included within research and development expense are staff costs totalling £2,477,000 (2019: £3,552,000) also included in note 8.

098

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements6. Operating loss continued

Auditors’ remuneration

Audit services:

– Fees payable to Company auditors for the audit of the Parent and the consolidated accounts

– Auditing the accounts of subsidiaries pursuant to legislation

Fees payable to Company auditors for other services:

– Assurance services in connection with the review of interim results

Total auditors’ remuneration

7. Exceptional items

31 July
2020
£’000

31 July
2019
£’000

72

33

15

120

50

26

15

91

During the financial year, the Group incurred a number of charges which are considered to be exceptional in nature. These have 
been aggregated and disclosed separately in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

(Charge)/income

Formal Sales Process (legal fees)

Fundraise (adviser and commitment fees)

IP litigation (prior to litigation funding agreement)

Customer contract liability waived

Financial impairment of production facility

Onerous lease provision

Provision for contract specific stock

Other US Customer contract liabilities

Restructuring cost

Total net exceptional items

31 July
2020
£’000

(293)

(237)

(64)

—

—

—

—

—

(128)

(722)

31 July
2019
£’000

—

—

—

4,245

(3,325)

(663)

(261)

(134)

(128)

(266)

During the year, as part of the Strategic Review, the Group entered into a Formal Sale Process that was subsequently terminated 
after the start of the Covid pandemic. In July 2020, the Group carried out a fundraising exercise, raising £3.2 million net of costs. 
Also during the year, the Group initiated a significant law suit against Samsung for wilful infringement of its IP. All three activities 
incurred adviser costs for processes that are considered corporate in nature and hence do not form part of the underlying business 
of the Group. They are therefore classified as exceptional to allow the reader a better understanding of underlying performance.

During the prior year, the US Customer confirmed that the project would not continue beyond the current contract which 
completed in December 2019. As a result, the following financial adjustments were posted:

  an outstanding contract liability owed by Nanoco Group to the US Customer was waived, resulting in an exceptional credit 

of £4.2 million;

  given the lack of any signed or near-term commercial prospects for the new production facility, a tangible asset impairment 

was posted of £3.3 million;

  linked to the above, an onerous lease provision was recognised in relation to the new production facility from the end 

of the existing contract with the US Customer to the expiry of the lease; and

  other liabilities or costs incurred in the period relating to the US Customer were a provision against stock purchased 

specifically for the US Customer and existing non-cancellable purchase commitments.

Further to the US Customer items above, following the resource pivot in our display business in the second quarter, a restructuring 
exercise reflecting our “dot only” focus in display activities was implemented. This exercise completed in the fourth quarter.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 099

Notes to the financial statements continued

8. Staff costs

The Group’s costs for employees, including Directors, during the year were as follows:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Share-based payments

Directors’ remuneration (including benefits in kind) included in the aggregate remuneration above comprised:

Emoluments for qualifying services

31 July
2020
£’000

3,652

346

166

376

31 July
2019
£’000

5,030

433

133

232

4,540

5,828

908

1,158

Emoluments for Directors of the Group (excluding social security costs and long-term incentives, but including benefits in kind) 
disclosed above include £323,000 paid to the highest paid Director (2019: £505,000). Details of the compensation of key 
management personnel are described in note 29.

The Group made contributions to money purchase pension schemes for three current Directors (2019: three).

Aggregate gains made by Directors during the year following the exercise of share options were £nil (2019: £89,000).

Not included in the costs reported above are share awards to be made to Directors under the Deferred Bonus Plan amounting to 
£nil (2019: £386,000) which are included in the Directors’ remuneration report. The awards are recognised in the income statement 
by way of a share-based payment charge over the deferral period as required by IFRS 2.

An analysis of the highest paid Director’s remuneration is included in the Directors’ remuneration report.

The monthly average number of employees during the year (including Directors) was as follows:

31 July
2020
Number

31 July
2019
Number

6

66

72

7

85

92

31 July
2020
£’000

31 July
2019
£’000

8

12

(29)

(51)

(7)

(79)

(28)

(10)

(26)

Group

Directors

Laboratory and administrative staff

9. Finance income and expense

Group

Finance income

Interest receivable

Finance expense

Loan note interest

Unwinding interest on lease liabilities

Other interest payable

100

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements10. Taxation

The tax credit is made up as follows:

Group

Current income tax

Research and development income tax credit receivable

Adjustment in respect of prior years

Deferred tax

Charge for the year

Total income tax credit

31 July
2020
£’000

31 July
2019
£’000

(909)

16

(893)

(1,128)

(23)

(1,151)

— 

—

(893)

(1,151)

The adjustments in respect of prior years relate to research and development income tax credits. The research and development 
income tax for the year ended 31 July 2019 was submitted in December 2019 and the repayment was received in January 2020. 
The income tax receivable shown in the statement of financial position is the R&D tax credit receivable reported above.

The tax assessed for the year varies from the standard rate of corporation tax as explained below:

Group

Loss before taxation

Tax at standard rate of 19% (2019: 19%)

Effects of:

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Capital allowances in excess of depreciation

Additional deduction for research and development expenditure

Surrender of research and development relief for repayable tax credit

Research and development tax credit receivable

Share options exercised (CTA 2009 Pt 12 deduction) 

Losses and share-based payment charges carried forward not recognised in deferred tax

Adjustment in respect of prior years 

Tax credit in income statement

31 July
2020
£’000

31 July
2019
£’000

(5,960)

(5,509)

(1,132)

(1,047)

55

16

(660)

1,216

(904)

— 

500

16

16

243

(1,022)

1,446

(1,128)

(26)

390

(23)

(893)

(1,151)

The Group has accumulated losses available to carry forward against future trading profits of £34,5 million (2019: £32.6 million).

Deferred tax liabilities/(assets) provided/(recognised) at a standard rate of 19% (2019: 17%) are as follows:

Accelerated capital allowances 

Tax losses 

31 July
2020
£’000

— 

—

—

31 July
2019
£’000

480

(480)

—

The Group also has deferred tax assets, measured at a standard rate of 19% (2019: 17%), in respect of share-based payments of 
£221,000 (2019: £8,000) and tax losses of £6,552,000 (2019: £5,486,000) which have not been recognised as an asset as it is not 
yet probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the assets can be utilised.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

101

Notes to the financial statements continued

11. Earnings per share

Group

Loss for the financial year attributable to equity shareholders

Share-based payments 

Loss for the financial year before share-based payments

Weighted average number of shares

Ordinary shares in issue

Adjusted loss per share before share-based payments (pence)

Basic loss per share (pence)

31 July
2020
£’000

31 July
2019
£’000

(5,064)

(4,344)

376

(4,688)

232

(4,112)

287,070,824 286,025,561

(1.63)

(1.76)

(1.44)

(1.52)

Diluted loss per share has not been presented above as the effect of share options issued is anti-dilutive.

12. Tangible fixed assets

Group

Cost

At 1 August 2018

Additions

Transfers

At 31 July 2019

Additions

At 31 July 2020

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 August 2018

Charged during the year

Impairment

At 31 July 2019

Charged during the year

At 31 July 2020

Net book value

At 31 July 2020

At 31 July 2019

Assets under
construction
£’000

Laboratory
infrastructure
£’000

Office
equipment,
fixtures
and fittings
£’000

Plant and
machinery
£’000

Total
£’000

1,391

1,882

(3,273)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

3,403

—

—

3,403

—

3,403

2,626

82

664

3,372

13

3,385

18

31

439

113

—

552

3

555

329

77

—

406

70

476

79

146

5,005

10,238

86

2,081

3,273

8,364

103

—

12,319

106

8,467

12,425

4,679

454

2,661

7,794

507

7,634

613

3,325

11,572

590

8,301

12,162

166

570

263

747

The aggregate original cost of tangible assets now fully depreciated but considered to be still in use is £9,193,000 
(2019: £7,777,000). 

During the prior year, the Group posted an impairment charge against the new facility in Runcorn due to the lack of firm 
customer orders (2019: £3,325,000). No impairment charge was posted in the current year.

Capital commitments

At 31 July 2020, the Group had capital commitments amounting to £nil in respect of orders placed for capital expenditure 
(2019: £nil).

102

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements13. Right of use assets

Group

Cost

At 1 August 2019

Additions

At 31 July 2020

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 August 2019

Charged during the year

At 31 July 2020

Net book value

At 31 July 2020

At 1 August 2019

14. Intangible assets

Group

Cost

At 1 August 2018

Additions

At 31 July 2019

Additions

At 31 July 2020

Accumulated amortisation

At 1 August 2018

Charged during the year

Impairment charge

At 31 July 2019

Charged during the year

Impairment charge

At 31 July 2020

Net book value

At 31 July 2020

At 31 July 2019

Total
£’000

981

136

1,117

—

(505)

(505)

612

981

Patents
£’000

5,670

1,043

6,713

598

7,311

2,238

552

26

2,816

633

120

3,569

3,742

3,897

Contingent consideration of $150,000 is payable in respect of a purchase of patents made during a previous period. The amount 
is payable if the Group reaches a revenue target in a future reporting period. 

Intangible assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over ten years. Amortisation provided during the period is recognised 
in administrative expenses. The Group does not believe that any of its patents in isolation are material to the business. The 
aggregate original cost of intangible assets now fully depreciated but considered to be still in use is £788,000 (2019: £556,000). 

During the year an extensive review was undertaken to identify patents which are deemed to be of no further value to Nanoco 
and should be allowed to lapse. As a consequence, patents with a value of £120,000 (2019: £26,000) have been fully impaired 
in these financial statements. The impairment charge is recognised within administrative expenses.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 103

Notes to the financial statements continued

15. Investment in subsidiaries

Company

At 1 August 2018

Increase in respect of share-based payments 

Cash transfer

Impairment

At 31 July 2019

Increase in respect of share-based payments 

Cash transfer

At 31 July 2020

By subsidiary

Nanoco Tech Limited

Nanoco Life Sciences Limited

Nanoco Technologies Limited 

At 31 July 2020

Shares
£’000

63,235

—

—

—

Share
impairment
£’000

Loans
£’000

Loan
impairment
£’000

Total
£’000

—

—

—

(24,006)

23,872

(20,286)

66,821

232

71

—

—

—

232

71

(3,889)

(27,895)

63,235

(24,006)

24,175

(24,175)

39,229

—

—

—

—

376

2

— 

—

376

2

63,235

(24,006)

24,553

(24,175)

39,607

63,235

(24,006)

—

—

39,229

—

—

—

—

20,286

(20,286)

4,267

(3,889)

—

378

63,235

(24,006)

24,553

(24,175)

39,607

Accounting standards (IAS 36 Impairment of Assets) require investments in subsidiary undertakings (equity and loans) to be carried 
at the lower of cost or recoverable value. Recoverable value is defined as the higher of fair value less costs of disposal (effectively 
net sale proceeds) and value in use. Indicators of potential impairment noted in IAS 36 (para 12) include, but are not limited to, 
situations where the carrying amount of the net assets of the entity is more than its market capitalisation (as was the case at the 
prior year end and continues to be so at the date of these financial statements) and where significant changes with an adverse 
effect on the entity have taken place during the period (the decision by the US Customer not to extend the current contract).

As set out in the viability statement, the Board has considered a number of scenarios, being base and downside cases. Given 
the uncertainty and risk over future income streams, and the associated potential impact on the discount rate to be used in the 
discounted cash flow, the Board has concluded that the appropriate valuation basis to use at this time for the total investments 
by Nanoco plc in Nanoco Technologies Limited (loans and equity as disclosed above and the short-term loan as disclosed in 
note 16) should be fair value rather than value in use. For the avoidance of doubt, in the base case set out in the viability 
statement there would be no impairment required to the assets above.

Consistent with IAS 36 and the indicator of impairment noted above in respect of net assets exceeding market capitalisation, 
the Directors have used the Company’s market capitalisation as at 31 July 2020 as its fair value less costs of disposal. While this 
is higher than in the prior year, the Directors do not believe that a sufficiently robust period of share price appreciation has 
occurred as yet to merit an upwards revision in the value of the investment, which has therefore been left unchanged.

The Directors do, however, consider that the current share price is still at a significant discount to the value of its IP, by reference 
to similar businesses operating in the same markets and with smaller IP portfolios than Nanoco.

Loans to subsidiary undertakings carry no interest and are repayable on demand. Further information in relation to these loans 
is given in note 28.

Subsidiary undertakings

Country of incorporation

Principal activity

Nanoco Life Sciences Limited 

England and Wales

Research and development

Nanoco Tech Limited

England and Wales

Holding company

Nanoco Technologies Limited1

England and Wales

Manufacture and development of nanoparticles

Nanoco 2D Materials Limited

England and Wales

Research and development

Nanoco US Inc.2

USA

Management services

Share of issued
ordinary share capital

31 July
2020

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

31 July
2019

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

All subsidiaries incorporated in England and Wales are registered at 46 Grafton Street, Manchester M13 9NT. Nanoco US Inc. 
is registered at 33 Bradford Street, Concord, MA 01742.

With the exception of the two companies footnoted below all other shareholdings are owned by Nanoco Group plc.

1  Share capital is owned by Nanoco Tech Limited.

2  Nanoco US Inc. is a wholly owned subsidiary of Nanoco Tech Limited. It was formed in July 2013 primarily in order to provide the services of US-located 

staff to the rest of the Group.

104

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements16. Inventories

Raw materials, finished goods and consumables

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

140

—

226

—

A total of £290,000 (2019: £316,000) was included in cost of sales with respect to the cost of inventory expensed during the year.

17. Trade and other receivables

.

Trade receivables

Prepayments and accrued income 

Inter-company short-term loan to subsidiary

Less impairment provision

Other receivables

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

489

397

—

—

132

1,018

—

—

60,383

(60,383)

—

—

202

383

—

—

532

1,117

—

—

60,383

(60,383)

—

—

The impairment of the short-term loan is explained in note 15. The quantum of this provision will be reviewed at each reporting date.

Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are generally due and paid within 30 to 60 days. The Directors consider that the 
carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value and that no impairment is required at the 
reporting date. Therefore there is no provision for impairment at the balance sheet date (2019: £nil).

Trade receivables are denominated in the following currency:

US Dollars

Euros

Sterling

At 31 July the ageing analysis of trade receivables was as follows:

2020

2019

18. Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

156

88

245

489

—

—

—

—

158

—

44

202

Not
yet due
£’000

442

133

Past due
90 days to
120 days
£’000

—

—

Due
£’000

47

69

Past due
> 120
£’000

—

—

—

—

—

—

Total
£’000

489

202

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

5,170

3,440

7,005

97

Under IAS 7, cash held on long-term deposits (being deposits with original maturity of greater than three months and no more 
than twelve months) that cannot readily be converted into cash must be classified as a short-term investment. There were 
no such deposits at 31 July 2020 (2019: same).

An analysis of cash, cash equivalents and deposits by denominated currency is given in note 28.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 105

Notes to the financial statements continued

19. Trade and other payables

Current

Trade payables

Other payables

Accruals

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

1,304

71

738

2,113

—

—

—

—

1,764

101

688

2,553

—

—

—

—

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value. The average credit 
period taken is 51 days (2019: 38 days).

20. Provisions

Current

Onerous lease provision

Other commitments

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

—

—

—

—

—

—

663

134

797

—

—

—

Provisions related to the contract with the US Customer. The onerous lease provision was reversed following the adoption of IFRS 
16. Details are included in note 7.

21. Financial liabilities

Non-current

Long-term loan from subsidiary

Convertible Series A Loan note 2028 

Accrued interest

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

—

400

62

462

450

—

—

450

—

400

33

433

450

—

—

450

The loan note issued by Nanoco 2D Materials Limited is unsecured, bears a fixed interest at 6.5% p.a. and is fully repayable 
with accrued interest in 2028 unless options to convert into shares of that company have been exercised. The note holders 
have a right to convert the loan note into shares of the subsidiary in certain circumstances but these are within the control 
of the Company. Interest is not charged on inter-company loans (2019: no interest).

There have been no changes in liabilities arising from financing activities other than described in this note.

106

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements22. Deferred revenue

Current

Upfront licence fees

Milestone payments

Non-current

Upfront licence fees

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

103

500

603

249

852

—

—

—

—

—

103

1,359

1,462

353

1,815

—

—

—

—

—

Deferred revenue arises under IFRS where upfront licence fees are accounted for on a straight-line basis over the initial term 
of the contract or where performance criteria have not been satisfied in the accounting period. 

23. Lease liabilities

Current

Property leases

Non-current

Property leases

24. Issued equity capital

31 July 2020
Group
£’000

31 July 2020
Company
£’000

31 July 2019
Group
£’000

31 July 2019
Company
£’000

642

542

—

—

—

—

—

—

Group

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 10p

At 1 August 2018

Shares issued on exercise of options

At 31 July 2019

Shares issued on placement

At 31 July 2020

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Reverse
acquisition
reserve
£’000

Total
£’000

Number

285,947,149

28,595

115,831

(77,868)

66,558

272,097

27

—

—

27

286,219,246

28,622

115,831

(77,868)

66,585

19,479,856

1,948

1,461

—

3,409

305,699,102

30,570

117,292

(77,868)

69,994

The balances classified as share capital and share premium include the total net proceeds (nominal value and share premium 
respectively) on issue of the Company’s equity share capital, comprising ordinary shares.

The retained loss and other equity balances recognised in the Group financial statements reflect the consolidated retained loss 
and other equity balances of Nanoco Tech Limited immediately before the business combination which was reported in the year 
ended 31 July 2009. The consolidated results for the period from 1 August 2008 to the date of the acquisition by the Company 
are those of Nanoco Tech Limited. However, the equity structure appearing in the Group financial statements reflects the 
equity structure of the legal parent, including the equity instruments issued under the share-for-share exchange to effect the 
transaction. The effect of using the equity structure of the legal parent gives rise to an adjustment to the Group’s issued equity 
capital in the form of a reverse acquisition reserve.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

107

Notes to the financial statements continued

24. Issued equity capital continued

Shares issued on placing 

On 15 July 2020, 19,479,856 shares were issued at 17.5 pence each.

Company

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of 10p

At 1 August 2018

Shares issued on exercise of options

At 31 July 2019

Shares issued on placement

At 31 July 2020

25. Share-based payment reserve

Group and Company

At 1 August 2018

Issue of share capital on exercise of share options

Share-based payments 

At 31 July 2019

Share-based payments 

At 31 July 2020

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Total
£’000

Number

285,947,149

28,595

115,831

144,426

272,097

27

—

27

286,219,246

28,622

115,831

144,453

19,479,856

1,948

1,461

3,409

305,699,102

30,570

117,292

147,862

£’000

3,214

(27)

232

3,419

376

3,795

The share-based payment reserve accumulates the corresponding credit entry in respect of share-based payment charges. 
Movements in the reserve are disclosed in the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

A charge of £376,000 has been recognised in the statement of comprehensive income for the year (2019: charge of £232,000).

Share option schemes

The Group operates the following share option schemes, all of which are operated as Enterprise Management Incentive (“EMI”) 
schemes insofar as the share options being issued meet the EMI criteria as defined by HM Revenue & Customs. Share options issued 
that do not meet EMI criteria are issued as unapproved share options, but are subject to the same exercise performance conditions.

Nanoco Group plc Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)

Grant in November 2011

Share options were granted to staff and Executive Directors on 25 November 2011. The options granted to Executive Directors were 
subject to commercial targets being achieved. The exercise price was set at 50 pence, being the average closing share price on 
the day preceding the issue of the share options. The fair value benefit is measured using a binomial model, taking into account 
the terms and conditions upon which the share options were issued. Share options issued to staff vest over a three-year period 
from the date of grant and are exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the award, but are not subject to performance conditions.

Grant in October 2012

Share options were granted to staff and Executive Directors on 22 October 2012. The options granted to Executive Directors were 
subject to commercial targets being achieved. The exercise price was set at 57 pence, being the average closing share price on 
the day preceding the issue of the share options. The fair value benefit is measured using a binomial model, taking into account 
the terms and conditions upon which the share options were issued. Share options issued to staff vest over a three-year period 
from the date of grant and are exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the award, but are not subject to performance conditions.

108

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements25. Share-based payment reserve continued

Share option schemes continued

Nanoco Group plc Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) continued

Grant in May 2014

Share options were granted to certain staff on 23 May 2014. The exercise price was set at 89 pence, being the average closing 
share price on the day preceding the issue of the share options. The fair value benefit is measured using a binomial model, taking 
into account the terms and conditions upon which the share options were issued. The options vest at the end of three years from 
the date of grant and are exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the award. The awards are not subject to performance 
conditions. Vesting of the award is subject to the employee remaining a full-time member of staff at the point of vesting. 
No options were granted to Executive Directors.

Grant in October 2014

Share options were granted to an Executive Director on 14 October 2014. The exercise price was set at 10 pence, being the 
nominal value of the share. The fair value benefit is measured using a binomial model, taking into account the terms and 
conditions upon which the share options were issued. The options vest at the end of three years from the date of grant and are 
exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the award. The awards are subject to performance conditions which were amended 
during the year so as to be in line with the 2015 LTIP scheme. As a result of the modification, the fair value of the award was 
reduced. However, in accordance with IFRS 2 no change was made to the charge in the financial statements. Vesting of the 
award is subject to the employee remaining a full-time member of staff at the point of vesting.

Nanoco Group plc 2015 Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)

Grants in December 2015, April 2016, November 2017 and November 2018

Following approval of the new scheme at the 2015 AGM, share options were granted to four Executive Directors at nil cost. The fair 
value benefit is measured using a stochastic model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the share options 
were issued. The options vest at the end of the three-year performance period subject to meeting the performance criteria 
(as detailed in the Directors’ remuneration report on page 69) and are exercisable after a two-year holding period until the tenth 
anniversary of the award. All subsequent awards are valued in the same way and also have three-year performance criteria 
followed by a two-year holding period for awards which vest.

Other awards

Share options are awarded to management and key staff as a mechanism for attracting and retaining key members of staff. 
The options are issued at either market price on the day preceding grant or, in the event of abnormal price movements, at an 
average market price for the week preceding grant date. On 14 October 2015, unapproved options were granted to a member 
of staff with an exercise price of 56.5 pence. These options vest over a three-year period from the date of grant with performance 
conditions and are exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the award. Vesting of the award is subject to the employee remaining 
a full-time member of staff at the point of vesting. The fair value benefit is measured using a binomial valuation model, taking 
into account the terms and conditions upon which the share options were issued.

Deferred Bonus Plan (“DBP”)

On 22 November 2016, awards in the form of nil-cost options were granted to the Executive Directors in respect of 50% of their 
bonuses for the year ended 31 July 2016 which are delivered in the form of a share award under the Deferred Bonus Plan. The 
awards vested during FY19, after the required two-year holding period.

On 31 October 2019 and 10 December 2019, awards in the form of nil-cost options were granted to the Executive Directors in 
respect of 100% of their bonuses for the year ended 31 July 2019 which are delivered in the form of a share award under the 
Deferred Bonus Plan. The awards vest in FY22, after the required two-year holding period.

The following tables illustrate the number and weighted average exercise prices of, and movements in, share options during the year.

Group and Company

Outstanding at 1 August

Granted during the year

Exercised during the year

Forfeited/cancelled/lapsed

Outstanding at 31 July

Exercisable at 31 July 

2020 total
Number

2019 total
Number

18,150,305

17,253,479

3,380,932

4,693,566

—

(274,096)

(3,849,690)

(3,522,644)

17,681,547

18,150,305

7,887,247

7,647,247

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020 109

Notes to the financial statements continued

25. Share-based payment reserve continued

Weighted average exercise price of options

Group and Company

Outstanding at 1 August

Granted during the year

Exercised during the year

Forfeited/cancelled

Outstanding at 31 July

2020
Pence

24.5

—

—

26.8

37.5

2019
Pence

35.9

—

—

—

24.5

The weighted average exercise price of options granted during the year to 31 July 2020 was nil (2019: nil). The range of exercise 
prices for options outstanding at the end of the year was nil–100.75 pence (2019: nil–110.00 pence).

For the share options outstanding as at 31 July 2020, the weighted average remaining contractual life is 4.91 years (2019: 5.83 
years). The aggregate fair value of options issued in the year was £0.4 million (2019: £0.9 million).

The following table lists the inputs to the models used for the years ended 31 July 2020 and 31 July 2019.

Group and Company

Expected volatility

Risk-free interest rate

Expected life of options (years average)

Weighted average exercise price

Weighted average share price at date of grant

Model used

Market  
performance-linked grants

Non-market
performance-linked grants

2020

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

2019

63%

0.82%

3

Nil

44p

2020

103%

0.43%

2

Nil

14p

Stochastic

Finnerty

2019

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

The expected life of the options is based on historical data and is not necessarily indicative of exercise patterns that may occur. 
The expected volatility reflects the assumption that the historical volatility is indicative of future trends, which may also not 
necessarily be the actual outcome.

Certain awards are subject to a holding period after vesting. A Finnerty model has been used to determine a discount for the 
lack of marketability of the shares.

26. Merger reserve and capital redemption reserve

Merger reserve

Group

At 1 August 2018, 31 July 2019 and 31 July 2020

£’000

(1,242)

The merger reserve arises under section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 on the shares issued by Nanoco Tech Limited to acquire 
Nanoco Technologies Limited as part of a simple Group reorganisation on 27 June 2007.

Capital redemption reserve

Company

At 1 August 2018, 31 July 2019 and 31 July 2020

£’000

(4,402)

The capital redemption reserve arises from the off-market purchase of deferred shares on 4 May 2005 and their subsequent cancellation.

110

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements27. Movement in accumulated losses 

Group

At 1 August 2018

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

At 31 July 2019

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

At 31 July 2020

Profit
and
loss
£’000

Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
£’000

Treasury
shares
£’000

Total
accumulated
losses
£’000

(55,862)

(4,358)

—

(60,220)

(5,067)

—

(65,287)

(13)

(20)

(55,895)

—

14

1

—

3

4

—

—

(4,358)

14

(20)

(60,239)

—

—

(5,067)

3

(20)

(65,303)

Profit and loss represents the cumulative loss attributable to the equity holders of the Parent Company.

Historically, treasury shares included the value of Nanoco Group plc shares issued as jointly owned equity shares and held by the 
Nanoco Group-sponsored EBT jointly with a number of the Group’s employees. At 31 July 2020 no shares in the Company were 
held by the EBT (2019: nil). In addition there are 12,222 (2019: 12,222) treasury shares not held by the EBT.

Company

At 1 August 2018

Loss for the year 

At 31 July 2019

Loss for the year 

At 31 July 2020

28. Financial risk management

Overview

Retained
deficit
£’000

(75,100)

(38,278)

(113,378)

Treasury
shares
£’000

Total
accumulated
losses
£’000

(20)

(75,120)

—

(38,278)

(20)

(113,398)

(66)

—

(66)

(113,444)

(20)

(113,464)

This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to various kinds of financial risks, the Group’s objectives, policies and 
processes for measuring and managing risk, and the Group’s management of capital.

The Board of Directors has overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. 
The Executive Directors report regularly to the Board on Group risk management.

Capital risk management

The Company reviews its forecast capital requirements on a half-yearly basis to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to 
continue as a going concern while maximising the return to stakeholders.

The capital structure of the Group consists of equity attributable to equity holders of the Parent, comprising issued share capital, 
reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in notes 22 to 25 and in the Group statement of changes in equity. At 31 July 2020 
total equity was £7,244,000 (2019: £8,523,000).

The Company is not subject to externally imposed capital requirements.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

111

Notes to the financial statements continued

28. Financial risk management continued

Liquidity risk

The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure that, as far as possible, it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet 
its liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage 
to the Group’s reputation.

The Group manages all of its external bank relationships centrally in accordance with defined treasury policies. The policies 
include the minimum acceptable credit rating of relationship banks and financial transaction authority limits. Any material 
change to the Group’s principal banking facility requires Board approval. The Group seeks to mitigate the risk of bank failure 
by ensuring that it maintains relationships with a number of investment-grade banks.

At the reporting date the Group was cash positive with no outstanding borrowings.

Categorisation of financial instruments

Financial
liabilities at
amortised
cost
£’000

Receivables
£’000

Group
£’000

Receivables
Company
£’000

489

527

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

202

915

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

489

527

—

—

—

—

60,383

(60,383)

(2,113)

(2,113)

—

(1,184)

(462)

—

—

(1,184)

(462)

—

—

—

—

—

(450)

(450)

1,016

(3,759)

(2,343)

Financial
liabilities at
amortised
cost
£’000

Receivables
£’000

Group
£’000

Receivables
Company
£’000

—

—

—

—

202

915

—

—

—

—

60,383

(60,383)

(2,553)

(2,553)

(797)

(433)

—

(797)

(433)

—

1,117

(3,783)

(2,666)

—

—

—

(450)

(450)

Financial assets/(liabilities)

31 July 2020

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Inter-company short-term loan to subsidiary

Less impairment provision

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Lease liabilities

Loan notes and accrued interest

Inter-company long-term loan from subsidiary

Financial assets/(liabilities)

31 July 2019

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Inter-company short-term loan to subsidiary

Less impairment provision

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Loan notes and accrued interest

Inter-company long-term loan from subsidiary

112

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements28. Financial risk management continued

Categorisation of financial instruments continued

The values disclosed in the above table are carrying values. The Board considers that the carrying amount of financial assets 
and liabilities approximates to their fair value.

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are credit risk and foreign currency risk. The Board of Directors 
reviews and agrees policies for managing each of these risks which are summarised below.

Credit risk

The Group’s principal financial assets are cash, cash equivalents and deposits. The Group seeks to limit the level of credit risk on the 
cash balances by only depositing surplus liquid funds with multiple counterparty banks that have investment-grade credit ratings.

The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties. Receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis 
with the result that the Group’s exposure to bad debts is not significant. The Group’s maximum exposure is the carrying amount 
as disclosed in note 16, which was neither past due nor impaired. All trade receivables are ultimately overseen by the Chief 
Financial Officer and are managed on a day-to-day basis by the UK credit control team. Credit limits are set as deemed 
appropriate for the customer.

The maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to cash, cash equivalents and deposits is the carrying value at the balance sheet date.

Foreign currency risk 

The Group is exposed to currency risk on sales and purchases that are denominated in a currency other than the respective functional 
currency of the Company. These are primarily US Dollars (“USD”) and Euros. Transactions outside of these currencies are limited.

Almost all of the Company’s revenue is denominated in USD. The Group purchases some raw materials, certain services and 
some assets in USD which partly offsets its USD revenue, thereby reducing net foreign exchange exposure.

The Group may use forward exchange contracts as an economic hedge against currency risk, where cash flow can be judged 
with reasonable certainty. Foreign exchange swaps and options may be used to hedge foreign currency receipts in the event 
that the timing of the receipt is less certain. There were no open forward contracts as at 31 July 2020 or at 31 July 2019.

The split of Group assets between Sterling and other currencies at the year end is analysed as follows (Company assets are all 
in Sterling):

Group

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade receivables

Trade payables

31 July 2020

31 July 2019

GBP
£’000

4,644

245

(1,157)

3,732

EUR
£’000

407

88

(10)

485

USD
£’000

119

156

Total
£’000

5,170

489

(137)

(1,304)

GBP
£’000

6,552

44

(887)

EUR
£’000

342

—

(3)

138

4,355

5,709

339

USD
£’000

111

158

(874)

(605)

Total
£’000

7,005

202

(1,764)

5,443

All other categories of assets and liabilities in the statement of financial position are denominated in Sterling.

Sensitivity analysis to movement in exchange rates

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a reasonably possible change in the Sterling rate against other currencies 
used within the business, with all other variables held constant, of the Group’s loss before tax (due to foreign exchange translation 
of monetary assets and liabilities) and the Group’s equity.

Increase/(decrease)

10%

5%

(5%) 

(10%)

Impact
on loss
before tax
and Group
equity
2020
£’000

Impact
on loss
before tax
and Group
equity
2019
£’000

85

40

(37)

(70)

(47)

(22)

20

39

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

113

Notes to the financial statements continued

28. Financial risk management continued

Interest rate risk

As the Group has no significant borrowings the risk is limited to the reduction of interest received on cash surpluses held at bank 
which receive a floating rate of interest. The principal impact to the Group is to interest-bearing cash and cash equivalent 
balances held, which are as set out below:

Total
£’000

7,005

(400)

97

Total
£’000

2,113

1,184

462

3,759

Total
£’000

2,553

433

2,986

Group

Cash and cash equivalents 

Loan notes

Company

31 July 2020

Fixed
rate
£’000

Floating
rate
£’000

—

5,170

Total
£’000

5,170

31 July 2019

Floating
rate
£’000

Fixed
rate
£’000

—

7,005

(400)

—

(400)

(400)

—

97

Cash and cash equivalents 

—

3,440

3,440

—

The exposure to interest rate movements is immaterial.

Maturity profile

Set out below is the maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities at 31 July 2020 and 31 July 2019 based on contractual 
undiscounted payments, including contractual interest.

2020

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Lease liabilities

Convertible loan (including contractual interest)

2019

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Convertible loan (including contractual interest)

Less than
one year
£’000

One to
five
years
£’000

Greater
than five
years
£’000

2,113

642

—

2,755

—

542

—

—

Less than
one year
£’000

One to five
years
£’000

2,553

—

2,553

—

—

—

—

—

462

462

Greater
than five
years
£’000

—

433

433

Trade and other payables are due within three months.

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of the financial liabilities approximates to their fair value.

As all financial assets are expected to mature within the next twelve months, an aged analysis of financial assets has not 
been presented.

The Company’s financial liability, a long-term loan from a subsidiary undertaking, is due after more than five years.

114

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements29. Related party transactions

The Group

There were no sales to, purchases from or, at the year end, balances with any related party.

The Company

The following table summarises inter-company balances at the year end between Nanoco Group plc and subsidiary entities:

Long-term loans owed to Nanoco Group plc by

Nanoco Life Sciences Limited

Nanoco Technologies Limited1

Less provision against debt owed by Nanoco Life Sciences Limited

Short-term loan owed to Nanoco Group plc by

Nanoco Technologies Limited2

Less impairment provision

Long-term loan owed by Nanoco Group plc to

Nanoco Tech Limited

Notes

31 July 2020
£’000

31 July 2019
£’000

20,286

20,286

4,265

24,551

3,889

24,175

(24,175)

(24,175)

376

—

60,383

60,383

(60,383)

(60,383)

—

—

15

15

17

17

21

(450)

(450)

1  The movement in the long-term loan due from Nanoco Technologies Limited relates to the recharge in respect of the expense for share-based payments 

for staff working for Nanoco Technologies Limited and is included in investments.

2  The movement in the short-term loan due from Nanoco Technologies Limited relates to transfers of cash balances between the entities for the purposes 

of investing short-term funds and the funding of trading losses.

There are no formal terms of repayment in place for these loans and it has been confirmed by the Directors that the long-term 
loans will not be recalled within the next twelve months.

None of the loans are interest bearing.

30. Compensation of key management personnel (including Directors)

Short-term employee benefits

Pension costs

Benefits in kind

Share-based payments

2020
£’000

1,314

46

— 

334

1,694

2019
£’000

1,771

53

—

201

2,025

The key management team comprises the Directors and three members of staff (2019: four) who are not Directors of the 
Company. The staff members of the team are the UK Finance Director, the HR Business Partner and the Production and Process 
Research Manager.

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

115

Investor information

Directors 

Independent auditors 

Dr Christopher Richards   Non-Executive Chairman 

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 

Brian Tenner  

Chief Executive Officer 

Dr Nigel Pickett  

Chief Technology Officer 

1 Hardman St  
Manchester M3 3EB 

Chris Batterham  

Non-Executive Director 

Dr Alison Fielding  

Senior Independent  
Non-Executive Director 

Secretary 

Liam Gray 

Registered office 

46 Grafton Street  
Manchester  
England M13 9NT 

Website 

www.nanocotechnologies.com 

Legal adviser 

Reed Smith LLP 

The Broadgate Tower  
20 Primrose Street  
London EC2A 2RS 

Investor relations 

MHP Communications 

6 Agar Street  
London WC2N 4HN 

Broker 

Peel Hunt LLP 

120 London Wall  
London EC2Y 5ET 

PR consultants 

Tier One Partners LLC 

80 Burlington Street  
Lexington  
MA 02420 

Registrar 

Neville Registrars 

Neville House  
Steelpark Road  
Halesowen B62 8HD

116

Nanoco Group plc  –  Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Financial statements 
 
CBP004694

The Group’s commitment to environmental issues is reflected in this Annual 
Report, which has been printed on Image Indigo, an FSC® certified material. 
This document was printed by Pureprint Group using its environmental print 
technology, with 99% of dry waste diverted from landfill, minimising the 
impact of printing on the environment. The printer is a CarbonNeutral® 
company. Both the printer and the paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

N

a

n

o

c

o

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

–

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0

Nanoco Group plc

46 Grafton Street 
Manchester 
M13 9NT 
UK

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
N
a
n
o
c
o
G
r
o
u
p
p
c

l

–

A
n
n
u
a

l

R
e
p
o
r
t
a
n
d
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
s

2
0
2
0